Priyan Dias-Graded Example To EC2.pdf-1 PDF

I '--
I , ..
t-:r, . i -
., ..
,
-.
I - -
, I
.. 1 ;>\,._
aded .Example i in
.
;' . .......,.. ~
Concrete Design
.j
.
. . !':1 . .' ,. I
: { . ~
E o code 2 (3rd edition)

'
.. [' .
. : l
..' I.
. :~
. .
::; c .
f
l
. ) .
1, _'
. r :
----.a
l/ .
. f .
Kesawan Sivakumar
I
_, rI '.
'
. \.

I. .
I
I Department of Civil Enghnee:ring
. I'- University of Mora-tuwa, Sri La~_ka
I
;l .
' _J
. !.
.I . .
Society of Structural Engineers - Sri Lank~a
. .
'
r
I
I
J
'. !'
:. I
. r -
. 1 Graded Examples in
. r Reinforced Concrete Design
: I to Euro code 2 (3rd edition)
:. f .
.I
' (.
- I
l
Priyan Dias
l and
l Kesawan Sivakumar
. i.
Department of Civil Engineering
. r..
University of Moratuwa, Sri Lanka
I.
!.
[ Society -o f Structural Engineers - Sri Lanka
L
PRE-PUBLICATION DRAFT
Published by the Society of Structural Engineers - Sri Lanka

12011 S Vidya Mawatha, off Wijerama Mawatha, Colombo 7
August 2012
l
This document shall not be reproduced or transmitted in any fonn in whole or par1 without
the express permission of the publisher
I
ii
I
PREFACE
Background and Acknowledgements
This is the third edition of this book. A significant departure from the first two editions is that
this one is based on Eurocode 2 for Concrete Structures. Sri Lankan engineers are not so
conversant with the new Eurocodes, and it is hoped that this book of examples will reduce the
discomfort of the transition from BS8 l l 0 to EC2.
I
I
This is also the first time the book has a co-author and the first author wishes to thank the
second for his painstaking perusal of a new code. He did this in the period between finishing
his undergraduate degree at Moratuwa University and embarking on a PhD at the Queensland
University of Technology. He was supported by a grant from the Society of Structural
r Engineers, Sri Lanka, who are in fact publishing this edition, as they did the first. Dr Premini
Hettiarachchi spent a considerable time checking the calculations and also sourcing the
relevant literature. Her name does not appear as another co-author only at her insistence! We
also thank Dr Kumari Gamage who was involved in this venture at the early stages.
The Transition from BS 8110 to EC2
EC2 is not an easy code to use. It focuses on theoretical principles rather than on practical
design. One manifestation of this is the structuring of the code by stress states (e.g. bending,
shear, torsion, anchorage, deflection, crack control etc) rather than by structural elements
(e.g. beams, slabs, columns, foundations etc) as in BS 8110. Another is the paucity of design
equations and design charts. In addition, some of the parameters in the code allow national
agencies to supply their own values through "national annexes". We have used relevant
values from the draft version of the Sri Lanka National Annexe (SLNA), produced by the Sri
Lanka Standards' Institute.
Two approaches have been used to make easier the use of EC2. One is to provide Appendices
at the end of this book with some design equations; the second is to refer to charts and other
helpful material, primarily in the Institution of Structural Engineers' Manual (IStructE
Manual) for the Design of Concrete Structures to EC2. We have also provided some design
charts for flexural reinforcement and shear resistance calculations in Appendices C and D
respectively; these charts are however not used in these design examples, which are worked
out from first principles as per EC2 guidance. In addition to the IStructE Manual that is
referred to widely, we have also had at times to refer to the Concrete Society-publications and
a few times even to BS 8110 itself - this is to fill any perceived gaps in the EC2 provisions.
We should also acknowledge two textbooks that we have been helped by, namely those by
I ! Moseley, Bungey & Hulse (whose 6th edition is to EC2), and the other by AH Allen.
l
l Some Differences in Process and Output
We will highlight some key differences between EC2 and BS 8110 with respect to both
L design process and design output. The partial safety factors for loads are smaller in EC2 than
l iii
in BS 8110, and the "all spans loaded" case in the latter has been replaced by the "adjacent
spans loaded" in the new code. EC2 is based on concrete cylinder strength, the lowest
structural grade being 20 (from corrosion durability considerations), whereas BS 8110 was
- based on concrete cube strength with a minimum grade of 25 . The depth of the compression
stress block in flexure . in EC2 is only 0.8 times the neutral axis depth (x), compared to the
depth of 0.9x in BS 8110. In order to ensure ductility, the ratio of neutral axis depth to
effective depth (i.e. x/d) is restricted to 0.45 in EC2, whereas 0.50 was permitted in BS 8110.
The design for durability in EC2 is more nuanced than in BS 8110, and hence more complex.
It involves (i) the choice of exposure condition from Table 4.1, which gives a much better
defined range of conditions than did BS 811 O; (ii) the selection of strength class from Annexe
E, .with possible modification through Table 4.3N; and (iii) the determination of the minimum
cover value from Table 4.4N. An allowance for construction deviations must be added to the
minimum cover value; this is usually taken as 10 mm for conditions employing normal
quality assurance. In this book of examples, the grades employed are at the lower end,
reflecting Sri Lankan practice. Grade 20/25 is used for indoor exposure conditions (XCl)
with a total cover of 25 mm, and grade 25/30 for outdoor exposure conditions (XC3) with a
total cover of 35 mm. It should be noted that the indicative strength class has been reduced
from C30/37 to C25/30 for outdoor exposure, on the basis that Sri Lankan concretes have
fairly low water/cement ratios for even fairly low grades. By this same argument, grade 16/20
concrete could in fact be used for indoor exposure in Sri Lanka, although we have not done
any calculations based on it. In addition, the current use of strength class C20/25 for outdoor
(non chloride) exposure can also probably be accepted (provided a 35 mm cover is specified).
For chloride environments however, the indicative strength class in Annexe Eis C30/37, and
whil e this could be reduced to C25/30 by the above argument, it wo uld not be wise to reduce
it below that. Maintaining a minimum grade of 25/30 with a cover of 35 mm for external
concrete in buildings along the coast will help to reduce some of the significant corrosion
problems experienced by such structures.
The design for shear and torsion are more theoretical and difficult to carry out in EC2. If
designed shear reinforcement is not required (due to the inherent resistance of the concrete
and the longitudinal steel), minimum reinforcement has still to be provided, as in BS 8110. If
shear reinforcement is required however, no advantage is taken of the above inherent
resistance, with the entire design shear force having to be carried by the shear reinforcement.
In addition, the capacity of notional concrete struts (in a strut and tie analogy) has to be
checked. The check is first perfom1ed assuming the minimum strut inclination to the
horizontal of 22 (cot 8 = 2.5). If a strut with this inclination is incapable of resisting the shear
force, the inclination that can in fact resist the force has to be calculated. If this inclination is
greater than 45 (cot 8 = 1), the concrete resistance is not sufficient and must be remedied by
an increase in beam depth or concrete grade. The design for torsion involves the conversion
of the concrete section into an equivalent thin walled closed section.
The design for deflection in EC2 is both different from BS 8110 and can also result in much
thinner slabs for lightly reinforced slabs, especially where concrete grades are high too. This
is counteracted in the IStructE Manual by specifying that the percentage of reinforcement
should not be taken as smaller than 0.35% .when determining the allowable span/depth ratio.
In this book, the above percentage has been set at 0.25%; however, in addition, absolute
limits to the allowable span/depth ratio have been set (rather arbitrarily, but reflecting current
practice) as 45 for two-way slabs, 40 for continuous one-way slabs and flat slabs and 35 for
simply supported one-way slabs.
iv
,.
.. ..
_
I
'.
' A Case for Worked Examples (from previous editions by Priyan Dias)
Educational purists may argue that worked examples are detrimental to student learning because
j. there is an element of "spoonfeeding" involved. While acknowledging that there is some truth in
this argument, the author would like to contend that worked examples do have a place in the
educational process.
l Knowledge can be acquired using two broad approaches - i.e. the deductive approach, having its
roots in Greek rationality, and the inductive approach, having its roots in Renaissance
I empiricism. Learning through worked examples is an inductive approach, and both the format
and content of this book reflect that approach.
The set of examples has been developed through the teaching of a course in Reinforced
J
Concrete Design at the University of Moratuwa, Sri Lanka. The examples are graded, leading
:. , r from an appreciation of reinforced concrete behaviour, through the design of structural elements,
to the analysis of a reinforced concrete structure. The student's understanding of the calculations
is deepened by the "Notes on Calculations" while the Introductory and Concluding Notes set
each example in a wider context. Hence, in this book, design principles are reinforced through
I practice, with guidance from notes.
However, this book should not be used as a "stand alone" text. It must essentially be
/"' complementary to another text or series of lectures that teaches design from a deductive
approach - i.e. one which moves students from principles to practice. It can, of course, be readily
used by practising engineers, who already have a grasp of reinforced concrete fundan1entals. In
i order to equip students for real design practice, the book is very much code based, with
extensive references given in the calculations to clauses in EC2 and other pertinent literature
listed below.
!
Key References
.. )
..
Allen, A.H. (1988) Reinforced Concrete Design to BS 8110 simply explained. EF & N Spon
L BS EN 1990: 2002. Eurocode - Basis of Structural Design, British Standards Institution,

London.
BS EN 1991-1-1: 2002. Eurocode 1: Design of Concrete Structures: Part 1-1: General actions
- densities, self weight, imposed loads for buildings, British Standards Institution,
London.
BS EN 1992-1-1: 2004. Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Structures: Part f-1: General rules
and rules for buildings, British Standards Institution, London.
BS EN 1992-1-2: 2004. Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Structures: Part 1-2: General rules-
structural fire design, British Standards Institution, London.
BS 8110: 1985. Structural use of concrete, British Standards Institution, London.
Concrete Centre (2005-2008) How to Design Concrete Structures using Eurocode 2: Parts 1-
11, The Concrete Centre, Camberley.
Institution of Structural Engineers (2006) Manual for the design of building structures to
Eurocode 2, IStructE, London.
v
Kesawan,S., Dias W.P .S and Hettiarachchi, M.T.P. (2012) Slab design based on Eurocode 2,
Modulus, Vol. 22, No . 1, Society of Structural Engineers, Sri Lanka, pp. 8-12.
Mosley, W.H . Bungey, J.H. and Hulse, R. (2007) Reinforced Concrete Design to Eurocode
2, 6th ed., Palgrave Macmillan, Basingstoke.
Sri Lanka Standards Institution (2011) Sri Lanka National Annex to Eurocode 1: Design of
Concrete Structures : Part 1-1: General actions - densities, self weight, imposed loads
for buildings (Draft), SLSI, Colombo.
Sri Lanka Standards Institution (2011) Sri Lanka Na ti on al Annex to Eurocode 2: Design of
Concrete Structures: Part 1-1 : General rules and rules for buildings (Draft), SLSI,
Colombo.
Sri Lanka Standards Institution (2011) Sri Lanka National Annex to Eurocode 2: Design of
Concrete Structures : Part 1-2: General rules - structural fire design (Draft), SLSI,
Colombo.
_J
vi
l
1.. I .
CONTENTS
J.
I
PREFACE 111
CHAPTER 1: Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure

Example 1 Analysis of Under-Reinforced Section 01
Example 2 Analysis of Over-Reinforced Section 04
Example 3 Analysis of Doubly-Reinforced Section 07
Example 4 Analysis of Non-Rectangular Section 09
CHAPTER 2: Design of Beam Sections in Flexure

::?~
Example 5 Design of Rectangular Section 11
Example 6 Design of Section with Redistribution 15
Example 7 Structural Analysis of Beam 17
I Example 8 Design of Beam for Flexure 21
1 Example 9 Design of Flanged Section 27
CHAPTER 3: Design of Beams for Shear

) . Example 10 Design of Section for Shear 30
Example 11 Design of Beam for Shear 34
CHAPTER 4: Serviceability Checks and Detailing in Beams

Example 12 Serviceability Checks and Detailing 40
) CHAPTER 5: Design of Slabs

Example 13 One Way Slab (Continuous) 52
Example 14 One Way Slab (Simply Supported) 58
l Example 15 Two Way Slab
Example 16 Flat Slab
64
69
\. Example 17 Ribbed Slab 78
/: ..
' CHAPTER 6: Design of Columns
Example 18 Column Classification 83
Example 19 Symmetrically Loaded Short Column 86
Example 20 Short Column with Axial Load and Moment 90
Example 21 Slender Column 93
I.
J
CHAPTER 7: Design of Foundations
t. Example 22 Pad Footing

Example 23 Combined Footing
Example 24 Pile Cap
99
106
113
r
- CHAPTER 8: Design of Staircases
Example 25 Staircase (between Beams) 118
L,
-
Example 26 Staircase (between Landings) 124
l vii
I
I.
CHAPTER 9: Design of wall and Corbel

Example 27 Plain Concrete Wall 128
Example 28 Corbel 132
CHAPTER I 0: Design of Beam for Torsion

Example 29 Design for Torsion 137
CHAPTER 11: Frame Analysis and moment Redistribution

Exmaple 30 Frame Analysis for Vertical Loads 143
Example 31 Frame Analysis for Horizontal Loads 149
Example 32 Redistribution of moments 152
CHAPTER 12: Design for Stability

Example 33 Design for Stability 154
CHAPTER 13: Severability limit State Calculations

Example 34 Crack Width Calculation 157
Example 35 Deflection Calculation 161
APPENDICES
Appendix A Formulae for Design 166
Appendix B Longitudinal Shear in Beams 170
Appendix C Design Charts: Singly Reinforced Section 171
Appendix D Design Charts: Concrete Shear Resistance 172
viii
I
CHAPTER 1
Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure
Example 1 - Analysis of Under-Reinforced Section

J
Determine the lever ann for the beam section shown in the figure; find also its moment of
resistance.
),
..; f" I< 225 ) I
fek = 20 MPa
fyk = 460 MPa
l 3 -20
d = 375
)

(All dimensions in mm)
l Introductory Notes
1. This exan1ple is regarding the analysis of an existing beam. The first step in finding the
moment of resistance is to find the lever arm.
I, -;_'.
- . . -
_,outp~f<-
2
Area of steel = 942.5 mm
Note 2 fyk = 460 MPa

fyk
3.2.7(2)
Figure 3.8 Ys
Note 3
2.4.2.4(1) Ys = 1.15
Table2.1N (for persistent and transient situations)
fyd = 0.87fyk
Note 4 fek = 20 MPa

t. 3.1.6 (1) fed=
O'.eefek
Yo
2.4.2.4(1)
t 3.1.6(1)
Ye = 1.5
aee = 0.85 (SLNA)
L Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 1

Reference c~1cui~tioils
. . ,.. - - .-.
.
oU.ipui
fed = 0.567fck
Note 5 Assuming that the steel has yielded,
T = 0.87 fykAs = (0.87)( 460)(942.5) = 377,189 N T = 377,189 N
Hence balancing compressive force = 377,189 N

3.1.7(3) (11 fed) (b) (Ii, x) = 377,189 N
Eq 3.19 'A=0.8and11=I .Oforfck $50MPa

Eq 3.21
(0.567)(20)(225)(0.8) x = 377,189 N
x = 185 mm
x 185 x = 185 mm
Since d = = 0.493 $ 0.64,
375
Note 6
steel has yielded and original assumption is correct.
z = d - (0.4)x = 375 - 0.4 x 185 = 301 mm z = 301 mm
Note 7 Note: 2/ d = 301h 75 = 0.8 < 0.95; hence OK
Moment of resistance= 377,189 x 301

= 113.53 xl06 Nmm
= 113.5 kNm
M = 113.5 kNm
Notes on Calculations
2. Clause 3.2.2(3) says that rules for design and detailing in this Eurocode are valid for a
specified yield strength range fyk = 400 to 600 MPa. The upper limit of this value varies
according to the country's national annex. In Sri Lanka the proposed value is 500 MPa. UK
uses a value of 500 MPa for routine design, but in Sri Lanka it is better to consider the steel
characteristic yield strength as 460 MPa, as per current practice.
3. We use the horizontal top branch in Figure 3.8, where the steel strain need not be checked.
4. fck is the characteristic cylindrical strength of concrete according to Clause -3.1.2(1).
5. Most singly reinforced sections will be under reinforced in practice. Hence, assuming that the
steel has yielded is the most convenient way of starting. (This assumption should be checked
later on of course, using the x / d value.)
6. The concrete strain in compression is limited to Ecuz according to Clause 3.1.7(1), where
Ecuz is 0.0035 from Table 3.1 - this is the failure criterion for reinforced concrete. The
condition that tensile reinforcement has yielded when the concrete strain is 0.0035, is
=
x/ d $ 0.64 (for fyk 460 MPa). This can be shown by assuming a linear strain distribution.
Sri Lanka National Annex recommends that x/d does not exceed 0.6; but EC2 recommends
that x/d be less than 0.45. In this example x/d is greater than 0.45. In designing of
Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 2
r
reinforcement it is better to limit x / d to 0.45. This will give enough warning before failure.
This limiting x / d value reduces if moment redistribution is carried out (Clause 5.5(4)).
These limitations will ensure ductile failure due to yielding of reinforcement bars and not
brittle failure due to crushing of concrete.
7. z is taken as not greater than 0.9 Sd as in BS81l0. This practice is maintained here.
Concluding Notes
1
8. The lever arm is the distance between the centroids of the tensile and compressive forces. This
separation between two opposite forces is what creates the moment of resistance in a flexural
element. Because this distance has to be accommodated within the depth of the section,
flexural elements have larger cross sections than compressive elements.
!.
[
(. .
r-
r
1 :
L
[
Example 2 - Analysis of Over-Reinforced Section
Detennine the lever ann for the beam section shown in the figure; find also its moment of
resistance.
I< 150 >I
.. fck = 20 MPa
d = 300
fyk = 460 MPa
2-25

Introductory Notes
1. This section is different from that in Example 1, in that it is over reinforced. The calculation
procedure is more complicated here.
Reference Calculations Output

Area of steel= 981.7 mm2
Assuming that the steel has yielded,

T = 0.87fykAs = (0.87)( 460)(981 .7) = 392,876 N
Hence, C = (TJ fcct) (b) (!.. x)
= (0 .567)fckb(0.8) X = 392,876
(0.567)(20)(150)(0.8) x = 392,876
x = 289 mm .
Note2 /ct
But x = 289 hoo = 0.963 > 0.64,
hence, steel hasll.Q.Lyielded.
We shall try to find a value for x, by trial and error, such

that T and C are approximately equal.
Try x = 200 mm
C = 0.567fck(b)(0.8)x = (0.567)(20)(150)(0.8)(200)
= 272,160 N
- (0 .0035) (300 - 200) - -3
Note 3 Es- -1.75x10
200
fs = Es Es
Es= 200 GPa
fs = (1.75 x 10- 3 )(200 x 10 3 ) = 350 N/mm 2

r
Reference Calculations . qutput

T = (350) (981.7) = 343,595 N
1. For a better approximation, try x = 210 mm.

Then C = 285,768 N and T = 294,510 N.
For a still better approximation, try x = 211 mm x = 211 mm

Then C = 287,129 N and T = 289,857 N
This approximation is sufficient.

Note:- x;d = 211hoo = 0.70 (> 0.64)
I':.
z = d - (0.40)x = 300 - (0.40)(211) = 216 mm
M = C. z = (287129)(216) = 62 x 10 6 Nmm
= 62 kNm M = 62 kNm
Note4 Note:- Alternative method of finding x.

f
Once it is established that the steel has not reached yield
point, for any given value of x,
r-
(0.0035)(300 - x)
Es =
l x
I.
co.0035) (300 - x) I
f5 = (200 X 10 3 ) N mm 2
x
T = (0.00 35 )( 3 00 - x) (200 x 10 3 ) x 981.7 N

I. x
C = (0.567)(20)(150)(0.8)x N
l'
(.
Putting T = C, we have the quadratic equation
x = 211 mm
xz + 505 x - 151497 = 0,
giving x = 211.5 or-716.5 mm
I
J
2. In some rare cases, as in this one, a beam may be over-reinforced, meaning that the
yielding of steel will not take place before the crushing of concrete. If such a beam
fails, it will do so suddenly, without warning, and hence over-reinforced beams are
discouraged in practice.
!.
3. Since the steel has not yielded, the stress can no longer be assumed to be 0.87fyk- Rather, the
stress is the steel is o&tained by
L (i) Determining the strain in the steel, assuming a linear strain distribution across the section

and
(ii) Using the stress-strain curve in Figure 3.8 of the code to arrive at the stress (the inclined
part of the design curve is used).
0. 87 x 460 = 400 N/mm 2
Strain
Strain diagram Stress - Strain diagram
4. It is possible to use this method because the stress-strain curve for steel below the yield point
is a single straight line.
Concluding Notes
5. One way of ensuring that the beam failure is ductile is to introduce some compress10n
steel, so that the x/d ratio will be reduced to 0.45 (see Example 3) .

f.
Example 3 - Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Section
Determine the amount of compression steel required, in order to make x/d = 0.4S m
Example 2. Find also the moment ofresistance of the resulting beam.
d' . ..
I< 150
,,
. A5
>I
..-. ~
, ,. _,
L
d = 300
2-25
l
::!
r (All dimensions in mm)
Introductory Notes
)
1. If it is found that a singly reinforced beam is over reinforced and it is desired to make it under
reinforced or balanced, tills may be achieved by
I (i) Increasing the depth of the section,
(ii) Increasing the breadth of the section
(i ii ) Introducing compression steel.
2. Increasing the breadth of the section will generally be uneconomical. Therefore, ifthe depth of
the section cannot be increased due to non-structural reasons, option (iii) above is used.
Note 3 Assume a suitable value ford', say SO mm. d' =SO mm

) .
For equilibrium of the section, the compression in the
top steel plus the concrete must equal the tension in
the bottom steel.
Setting x = (0.4S)d = 13S mm (which automatically

ensures the yielding of tension steel), we have
Appendix A.3 d'jx --
0.37 $ 0.43,
which means that the compression steel will yield as
well.
By balancing the compression and the tension force,

I. (0.87)fykA~ + (O.S67)fckb(0.8)x = (0.87)fykAs
(0.87)( 460)A~ + (O.S67)(20)(1S0)(0.8)(13S) =
(0.87) ( 460) (981. 7)
l Hence, A~ = S23 mm 2 As'= S23 mm 2
L Analy sis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 7

Note 4 Use 3Tl6 (A~ = 603 mm 2) Use 3T16
Note:- (603 mm2)
Note 5 lOOA~/ _ (100) (603)/
Ac - (150)(350)
= 1.15 > 0.2; hence OK

Appendix A.2 Lever arm for balanced section
= d - (0.4)(0.45d)
= (0.82)d = (0.82)(300) = 246 mm
Distance between top and bottom steel = 250 mm
Note 6 Hence, taking moments about level of tension steel,
moment of resistance
= (0.567)(20)(150)(0.8)(135)(246) +
(0.87)(460)(523)(250) = 97,518,318 Nmm
= 97.52 kNm M = 97.52 kNm
3. The value of d' will depend on the cover, and other requirements (see Example 8).
4. If the compression steel provided is greater than that required, the neutral axis depth will be
reduced slightly; thi s is desirable, as it will increase the ductility of the section.
5. When compression steel is provided, a minimum percentage is required. The area of concrete
is based on the gross section, and the overall depth is taken as (300 + 50) = 350 mm. The
compression reinforcement percentage in beams should be greater than 0.2% as per IStructE
Manual (Clause 5.4.4.2).
6. In general, the most convenient way of finding the moment of resistance for a doubly
reinforced section is to take moments about the level of tension steel. The amount of
compression steel to be used in the calculation is the amount required (523 mm 2) , and not the
amount provided (603 mm2) .
Concluding Notes
7. The moment of resistance of a doubly reinforced section can be considered to be the sum of
the moments of resistance of (i) a balanced section and (ii) a "steel section" , consisting of
equal amounts of tension and compression steel, separated by (d-d').
,. 150 .., 150
T-
Id'= so
IT
r ~ 1
523 mm2 . 523 mm 2

T
d = 300
246 + 250 mm
1 -
459 mm 2
(i)
_j_ ~m2 i l_
:. ....................................;
(ii)

J
I
I. 1- Example 4 - Analysis of Non-Rectangular Section
- l
Determine the moment carrying capacity of the trapezoidal beam section shown below.
300
I
I. fck = 20 MPa
d = 400 fyk = 460 MPa
h = 450
I 2-25

I( 150 )I
I
:( r --
1
Introductory Notes
I 1. As in previous examples, the moment carrying capacity has to be found by working from first
principles. The additional complication in this example is that the section is non-rectangular.
- ---
. ,
- .. .
Reference Calcufations - - -output
l Assume values for the neutral axis, x until the
compression in concrete is equal to the tension in steel.
[
The area of the section under compression
=(0.5)(0.8)x[600 - {(300 - 150)/450}(0.8)x]
Area of steel= 981.7 mm2
I
)u
t~ 300 ~I
Assume also that the steel has yielded. \ J

0.8 x /
[. Try x = 100 mm
0
~
Area in compression, Ac
= (0.5)(0.8)(100){600 - (0.33)(0.8)(100)} -~
1 = 22,944 mm2 150
j
C = (0.567)fck.Ac = (0.567)(20)(22,944) = 260,185 N

I
J
T = (0.87)( 460)(981.7) = 392,876 N
Try x = 155 mm x = 155 mm

I Then, C = 393,078 N and T = 392,876 N.
This approximation is satisfactory.
Note also that x / d < 155/ 400 = 0.39 < 0.64;
hence assumption that steel has yielded is OK
l.
Reference CaklJ.lat~ons .-
Depth in compression= (0.8) (155) = 124 mm.

The centroid of the compression zone from the top of the
section is
{ (150)(124) (1) + (0.5)(150)(124) (-)}
y = {(150)(124) + (0.5)(150)(124)}
Note 2 = 55.11 mm
Hence, lever am1 (z) = 400 - 55.11 = 345 mm z = 345 mm

M = C.z = (393,078)(345) = 135.6 x106 Nmm
= 136 kNm M = 136 kNm
Note 3 Note: - Alternative method of finding x.
Assuming that steel has yielded,

T = (0.87)(460)(981.7) = 392,876 N
For any x, the area under compression is

Ac= (0.50)(0.8)x[600 - {(300 - 150)/450}(0.8)x]
C = (0.567)(20)Ac
Putting T = C, we have the quadratic equation,

x 2 - (2273)x + 328079 = 0,
giving x = 155 or 2118 mm
Since x/d = 155/400 = 0.39 < 0.45, steel has in fact x = 155 mm
yielded, as assumed.
2. The lever arm cannot be taken as d - (0.40)x in this case, because the area in compression is
non-rectangular.
3. This calculation will become a little more complicated if the section is not under-reinforced
(see Example 2).
Concluding Notes
4. This approach from first principles, using the idea of strain compatibility, will have to be
employed even in the design of beams such as these, which are non-rectangular, since the
design formulae in Appendix A apply only to rectangular sections.

r
I; I
CHAPTER2
I
Design of Beam Sections in Flexure
I
Example 5 - Design of Rectangular Section

Design a rectangular beam to take an ultimate load moment of 15 0 kN m,
(i) as a singly reinforced beam and
I
). (ii) as a beam whose overall depth is limited to 400 mm.
Assume that fck = 20 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa, and that the difference between effective depth
and overall depth is 50 mm. Assume also that no redistribution of moments has been carried out.
Introductory Notes
1. This is the first example on the design, as opposed to the analysis of a section. Where beams (as
opposed to slabs) are concerned, it will be often found that the moment carrying capacity is
more critical than the deflection criterion, and that the former will govern the selection of cross
sectional dimensions.
(a) Singly reinforced section
Note 2 Let us assume that djb = 2.0

In order to find the minimum depth for a singly reinforced
section, we should assume that x / d = 0.45
and K = M/bd2fck
Appendix A.2 Then K = K' = 0.167
l
J
0.167 = (150 x 10 6 )/{(d/2)(d 2)(20)}
d 3 = {(2)(150 x 10 6 )/(0.167)(20)}
d = 448 mm dmin=448 mm
LJ
Note 3
Eq A.5
Choose d = 475 mm, h = 525 mm, b = 225 mm
Now K = M/bd2fck
d = 475 mm
h = 525 mm
_ 1so x10 6 I b = 225 mm
l - {(225)(475) 2(20)}
= 0.148 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
! EqA.6
[ .'
L Design of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 11

. .. . . ,::,_,~ .1\:;,._,.,.!; . 1.-. :.t.,~~-' ;. ~... ~ -
Reference ~ .Calcu\ations
z = c475) [ o.5 + j (0.25 - 0 148I i. 134 )]
= 402 mm< (0.95)(475) = 451 mm .. 225

.
So z = 402 mm
525
t t
475
Eq A.9 As= M/co.87fykz)

_ 150 x10 6
-
I
0.87 x 460 x 402
i l 2T25
As,req = 932 mm2

= 932 mm 2 2T25 (981.7 mmZ)
Hence use 2T25 (As= 981.7 mm2)
Check for minimum reinforcement

Note 4
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 f;rm btd but not less
9.2.1.1(1) yk
Eq 9.lN than 0.0013btd

f
0.26 ;tm btd = 133 mm 2
yk
0. 0013btd = 139 mm 2
Table 3.1 [ fctm = 2.2MPa]
As.prov= 981.7 mm 2 > 139 mm 2 ; hence OK
9.2.1.1(3) Check fo r maximum reinforcement

100A 5 / _ (982)(100) /
Ac - / (525)(225)
= 0.83 < 4; hence OK

(b) Overall depth restricted
Note 5
d = 350 mm
If the overall depth is restricted to 400 mm b = 225 mm
h = 400 mm, d = 400 - 50 = 350 mm
b = 225 mm (assuming the same breadth as before)
Now K = M/bd 2 f
ck
_ 150 x10 6 /
- {(225)(350) 2 (20)}
= 0.272 > 0.167(i. e. K')
Appendix A.2
Hence compression reinforcement is required.
Let us assume d' = 50 mm.
2
A' CK - K')fck bd
Eq A.13 s 0.87fyk(d - d')
(0.272 - 0.167)(20)(225)(350) 2 A~.req = 482 mm 2
-
0.87(460)(350 - 50) Use 2T16 & 1T12
= 482 mm 2 (515 mm 2 )
Use 2T16 & 1 Tl2 (A~ = 515 mm 2)
Design of Beam Sections in Flexure Page12

:
j.
Reference Calculations Output ~
IStructE 100A~; _ 100 x sis;
Manual Ac - 22S x 400
I (5.4.4.2) = O.S72 > 0.2; hence OK
Eq A.6 z =ct [o.s + j(o.2s - K/i. 134)]
z = (3SO) [o.s + J(o.2s- 0 167/ 1.134 )]

l
= 287 mm< (0 .9S)(3SO) = 333 mm
..,
I
{ Kbalfckbd
2
Eq A.14 As= +A~
... 0.87fykZbal As= 1284 mm 2
..
r (0.16 7) (20) (2 2S) (3S0) 2
Use 2T25 & 1 T20
Note 6 = (0.87)(460)(287) + 482
(1296 mm 2 )
= 1284 mm 2
"l Use 2T2S & 1 T20 (As = 1296 mm 2 )
9.2.1.1(1) Check/or minimum reinforcement

) As.prov= 1473 mm 2 > 139 mm 2 ; hence OK
fctm
[ 0.26-f-btd = 133 mm 2 ;
yk
0.0013btd = 139 mm 2 ]
Note 7 Check for maximum reinforcement ~
225
.
9.2.1.1(3)
lOOA~j _ 100 x 1473/
Ac - 225 x 400
t @) 0 @
2T16& 1TJ2
t
525 475
i l
= 1.64 < 4.0; hence OK
2T25 & 1T2C
Note 8 Hence, use 2T2S & 1T20 (bottom)

l. and 2T16 & 1 T12 (top)
l
j Notes on Calculations
2. In practice, the ratio of depth to breadth for a beam will have a value between 1.S and 2.S.
l.
3. Many designers still choose dimensions for beams and columns in steps of 25 mm, because
an inch is approximately 25 mm. Furthermore, depths considerably in excess of the minimum
l. depth for a singly reinforced section may be chosen, in order to reduce the steel requirement.
! 4. The check for minimum reinforcement i$ almost always satisfied for tension steel in beams. A
little care should be exercised, however, for compression steel. The minimum amount of
reinforcement is given to control cracking.
l 5. The overall depth of the beam may have to be restricted, due to architectural requirements. On

the other hand, there may be some economy in designing beams with a marginal amount of
compression steel, because longitudinal steel on the compression face will be required
anyway, in order to support the shear links.
6. When calculating the area of tension steel, it is sufficient to use the value of compression steel
required (as opposed to that provided), in this equation.
7. The maximum reinforcement percentage is limited in order to ensure that concrete is properly
compacted around the reinforcement.
8. When providing reinforcement, a combination of bar sizes should be adopted such that the
maximum and minimum spacing between bars is kept within specified limits (see
Example12).
Concluding Note
9. The Eurocode EC2 does not provide design charts, unlike BS 8110. The IStructE Manual
does not contain design charts for beams and slabs, although it does have charts for column
design. Moseley et al (2007) give a chart for converting M/bdZfck values to z values.
Appendix D of this book provides a table for this same purpose. Nevertheless, all the
reinforcement calculations in the examples that follow are done using the equations derived in
Appendix A.
, .. Il
- --- I
.-- '!,J
I.
,, .II 7-.. -. _:_(
'-' -
)
- ,, ,'
C
r.// ' '..____
;. Ci J.--
/r !\. ~J I r-- I\ -
1--Y~ ;'
,~.
I -' I( I ./ c I
(.....l___
- . I,
/J: ;'-( (
/ .,,. -',.,
.I; .
< ';L / t _,,,/
-I

1
r
Example 6 - Design of Section with RedistributioQ
------ - - - -~ ---- - -
I If the beam section in Part (a) of Example 5 (h = 525 mm, d = 475 mm and b = 225 mm) was
/ carrying an ultimate moment of 150 kNm after a 30% downward redistribution of moment, find
the steel reinforcement required. Assume that d' = 50 mm, fck = 20 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
Introductory Notes
1. If the moment at a section has been reduced by downward redistribution, that section must
have adequate rotational capacity at ultimate limit state, in order for plastic hinge action to take
)' place. This capacity is ensured by restricting the x / d ratio to a value lower than the usually
applied limit.
.l )'"..
I
Reference
-
-
-
Calf_ulati?P,s .. - Output
) 5.5(4) 8 2: k 1 +(k2Xu/ d), for fck :::; 50 MPa

Eq 5.!0a 8 = (1 - 0.3)/1 = 0.7 .~
\,'
I 5.5(4) k 1 = 0.4 and k 2 = 1 (SLNA)
-
'
' I
So for 0.7 2: 0.4 + (1)(xu/d)

x
l Note 2
~<0.3
d - \
r_-..\
'
Appendix A.2 K' - Mbal/ 2 '\
l - bd fck
.,
-
3.1.7 (3) S = 0.8Xbal = 0.8 X(~ = 0.24d

I Zbal = d - 5/2 = 0.813Cl
I
Fccbal = 0.567fckbs = 0.136fc1cbd
Mbal = FccbaJZbal = 0.136fc1cbd
, X 0.88d
): . ~ Mbal rQ.12)
= bd 2fck =~ .- -
l
l
Eq A.5 Now, K = M/bdZf
ck
(150 x 10 ) ~
6
-
! K= {(225)(475) 2 (20)}
K = 0.148 > 0.12

I Hence, compression steel is required.
l.
r i Eq A.6 z = d [o .5 + jco.25- K/1 .134)]

z = (475) [o.s + j(o.zs - o.iz;u 34 )]
L z = 418 mm< (0.95)(475) = 451 mm

Reference .Cakulatioi:ts--
. . . . . - output :
2
Eq A.13 A' _ (K - K')fck bd
5
- 0.87f5 k(d - d')
(0.148 - 0.12)(20)(225)(475) 2
--
0.87(460)(475 - 50)
1
= 167 mm 2 As,req = 167 mmZ

Use 2T12
Note 3 Use 2T12 (A~ = 226.2 mm 2 ) (226.2 mm 2 )
lOOA~/
IStructE _ 100 x 226.2/
Ac - 225 x 475 ~
225
.
Manual
(5.4.4.2)
= 0.191 < 0.2; but acceptable t
2Tl2

t
475
< 4.0; hence OK 525
Eq A.14
A _
s -
K'fck bd 2
0.87fykZbal
+A~ ~
2T25
l
(0.12) (20) (225) ( 4 75) 2
167 As,req = 895 mmz
= (0.87)(460)(418) + r -,
= 895 mm 2 Use 2T25 I
Use 2T25 (A 5 = 981.7 mm 2 ) (981.7 mm2)
Hence, use 2T25 (bottom) and 2T12 (top).

This satisfies the min and max allowable reinforcement.
2. Any value below x/ d = 0.30 will give a feasible combination of 100As/bd and 100As'/bd,
but x/ d = 0. 30 will generally minimize the total amount of steel required. Although
x/d will vary from 0.45 to 0.6 as the moment redistribution is varies from 15% to 0%
according to Eq 5.1 Oa, in no case should the x/ d value be taken as greater than 0.45.
3. Although smaller diameter bars would have satisfied the compression steel requirement, in
general bars smaller than 12 mm diameter are not used for main reinforcement in beams and
columns, as they will not be stiff enough during fabrication. Also, in this example, smaller
diameter bars would not have satisfied the minimum steel requirement.
Concluding Notes
4. Although the applied moment for this section was the same as that in Example 5, this section
had to be doubly reinforced because of the restriction on the neutral axis depth for the purpose
of ensuring plastic hinge rotation,.
5. Hence, doubly reinforced sections may be required when

(i) Architectural reql:lirements place limits on the beam depth and/or
(ii) Significant redistribution of elastic moments has been carried out at a section. 1
Design of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 16
. - ; ;
I
!
1 . ). Example 7 - Structural Analysis of Beam
I Determine the design ultimate load moments for the beam shown in the figure, using also the
I following information.
(i) Dead load from the parapet wall can be taken as a line load of 2.0 kN/m.
(ii) Allowance for finishes on the slab can be taken as 1.0 kN/m 2.
(iii)Imposed load on slab should be taken as 4.0 kN/m 2 .
(iv)Density ofreinforced concrete= 25 kN/m3.
Introductory Notes
'
I ' 1. This example involves load evaluation and a simple structural analysis on appropriate loading
... / patterns, in order to find the design ultimate moments .
.:: .i ,..
r
100
450
_l_
300
Beam Section
jo11
2000 6000
Sectional Elevation
~
- -----------l--l------------------------------------------L--
1 I
:
I
I I I
- -----------~--~------------------------------------------~--
' I I
} I I I
I
I
3500
l
J
-
-
-----------+--t------------------------------------------~--
1 I
I
I
-----------i1 - -~------------------------------------------~--
I I
I I I
I
l.
.l 3500
l -
-
I I
-----------+--~------------------------------------------~--
' I
-----------i;~--------------------~---------------------r
I
I ~ I
Plan
l:
~

Reference Calculations Ou_tput
Note 2 The beam can be idealised as follows.
t
Note 3
2000 i fiOOO
~
. The critical moments for design will be
~ (i) Hogging moment at B
(ii) Sagging moment in span BC
Loading on beam (perm length)
Note 4 From slab = (0.125)(25)(3.5) = 10.94 kN/m

From finishes= (1.0) (3.5) = 3.50 kN/m
From beam= (0.45-0.125)(0.3)(25) = 2.44 kN Im
Total dead load udl (Gk, 1 ) = 16.88 kN/m
Dead load point load at A (Gk,z ) = 2 x 3.5
= 7.0 kN
Live load udl = ( 4.0)(3.5) = 14.0 kN/m
The hogging moment at B will be maximum when the

cantilever portion AB is loaded with the maximum design
ultimate load, irrespective of the load on the span BC.
The sagging moment in BC will be a maximum when the
cantilever portion AB has the minimum design ultimate
load, while the span BC has the maximum design ultimate
load.
5. 1.3 (1) Maximum design ultimate load (udl)

1.35Gk,1+1.5Gk,2 = (i35)c16.88)+( 1 ~14.0)
= 4D 9 kN/m ~
Note 5 Minimum design ultimate load (udl)
1.35 Gk.1 . = <( 1.35~ 16.88) ._)
= 2'2~79 kN/m
Maximum design ultimate load due to the parapet
1.35 G1<,2 = 1.35 x 7 kN = 9.45 kN
Minimum design ultimate load due to the parapet
1.00 G1<,2 = 7 kN

I
[ ..
l Reference Calculations Output
Hogging moment at B
i. 9.45kN
bvvy ./'" kN/m
A
4 B ct
Ms = (1.35)(7.0)(1.95) + (43.79) (2.0) 2 /2

= 106 kNm Ms= 106 kNm
(hogging)
I
I Sagging moment in BC
7kN
..
r ~ 43.79kN/m
A 227~
B
). x
M 8 = (7)(1.95) + (22.79) (2.0) 2 /2 = 59.23 kNm

)'.
Taking moments about B for BC,
Rc(6) + 59.23 = (43.79) (6.0) 2 /2
r Re = 121.5 kN
Mx = (121.5)x - ( 43.79) (x) 2 /2

l Mx = 0 at x = 0 m & 5.55 m
dMx/dx = 0 gives:
l
( 43.79)x = 121.5
x = 2.77 m Msc= 168.6 kNm
.. /, Mmax = (121.5)(2.77) - (43.79) (2.77) 2 /2 (sagging)
.:.
= 168.6 kNm
)
)
.J
2. Idealization is the first step in analysis. Since it is not possible to model the actual structure
with complete accuracy, idealization should be performed such that the results obtained are
r.
.I
conservative. For example, although point Chas a certain degree of restraint, it is impossible
to quantify it. However assuming the end C to be simply supported will give a higher (and
hence conservative) moment in the span BC. The restraint moment at C can be subsequently
r accounted for by providing a nominal amount of hogging steel there.
L
3. The point load will in fact act at 1.95 m to the left of B. At supports C and B, it is assumed
column dimension is similar to that of the depth of the beam. So the effective span becomes
the distance between the centres of the supports (Clause 5.3.2.2 (1)).
4. Since the beam spacing is 3.5 m, each beam carries the loads acting on a strip 3.5 m wide.
5. All actions originating from the self weight of the structure may be considered as originating
from one source and hence there is no requirement to consider different factors on different
spans (Clause 3 .2, IStructE Manual). Since the weight of the slab is considered as occurring
from one source, the factor of 1.35 is to both spans when calculating the design sagging
moment in BC, although the dead load in span AB is 'favourable'. The favourable parapet
wall load is of course factored by 1.0.
Concluding Notes
6. Where dead and imposed loads are combined, as in the case of this example, the design
moments at critical sections have to be arrived at by a proper combination of loading patterns.
L.J

l
)-.
[ ' Example 8 - Design of Beam fo r Flexure
Design the reinforcement for hogging and sagging moments in the beam in Example 7. Use fck =
25 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
Introductory Notes
1. In this example, only the reinforcement for the maximum sagging and hogging moments needs
to be calculated, since the beam section is already specified in Example 7.
2. Furthermore, as the bending moment diagram for the beam has not been drawn (although it
: .
..
! could be), the curtailment of reinforcement is not considered. This aspect is considered in
Example 12.
[
I
l
Reference c akuiatibhs
.. , .
.. .::; : ..
- ... . .
;.
Output
).
Determination of Cover
4.4.1.1 (2) Cnom = Cmin + llcdev
r 4.4 .1.2(2)
Eq 4.2
Cmin = max( Cmin,b; ( Cmin,dur + flCdur,y - flCdur,st -
.6Cctur,add); 10 mm}
i 4.4.1.2 (3) Cmin,b= 25 mm
[It is assumed that reinforcement bars are separated (not bundled
together) and T25 bars are used] - -
l Note 3 Assume outdoor exposure without chlorides
Table 4.1 So class designation is XC 3
Note 4 Assuming a design working life of 50 years, the structural class
4.4.1.2(5) is S4.
)..' .
Table 4.4N Hence Cmin dur = 25mm
4.4.1.2(6) llcdur,y = 0
4.4.1.2(7) flCctur st = 0
r
_, 4.4.1.2(8) llcdur add = 0
So Cmin,dur + llcdur,y - llcdur,st - .6 Cdur,add = 25 mm
t BSEN Provide fire resistance of 2 hours for continuous reinforced

beams. One of the possible combination.is
) .
1992-1-2
(Table 5.6) bmin = 300 mm and a= 35mm
IStructE a 5 d = 35 + 10 = 45 mm
Manual (If link diameter is taken as 10 nun)
I' (Table 5.11) Then Cmin,f = 35 - 10 - (25/2) = 12.5 mm

Cmin ' asf = 45 - 10 - (25/2). = 22.5 mm
[22.5 mm is the side cover required to resist fire, and is not
I. needed in the calculation of effective depth]

. .
Reference Calculatio-ns :- output -~
So Cmin = 25mm
4.4.1.3(1) liCctev = lOmm
Cnom = 25 + 10 = 35mm Cnom = 35 mm
Assuming a link diameter of 10 mm and a reinforcement size of

Note 5 25 mm, the effective depth will be
d = 450 - 35 - 10 - 25/2 = 392.5 mm
Design for hogging moment
The beam behaves as a rectangular beam.

Example 7 b = 300 mm, d = 392.5 mm, M = 106 kNm
Eq A.5 K = M/bct2fck
6
- (106 x 10 )
-
Ii
((300)(392 .5) 2(25)}
= 0.092 <'0.167; hence singly reinforced
Eq A.6 z =ct [o.5 + jco.25 - K/i. 134 )]
\c z = (392.5) [o.5 + jco.25 - 0.092/i. 134 )]

' J
z = 357.5 < (0 .95)(392.5) = 373 mm;
'-~'\
so take z = 357.5 mm !
0
M
Eq A.9 A5 -
- 0.87fykZ
< As,req = 741
(106 x 10 6 )
-- mm 2
r
,, \ I
(0.87)( 460) (357.5)
Use 2T20 &
" ... = 741 mm 2
II Use 2T20 and 1 T16 (A 5 = 829 mm 2)
1T16
! (829 mm 2)
,!
(hogging)
'1:.--f\ Design for sagging moment
-
I ....... 1
I
,I c:::J
Example 7 The beam behaves as a flanged T beam. M = 169 kNm
':\' ..... 5.3.2.1(3) be ff = L beff,i + bw ::=; b
beff,i = 0.2bi + 0.11 0 :::; 0.21 0 -....J
On both sides of the beam, the slab span length is equal so

beff,l = beff,2
b 1 = (3.5 - 0.3) /2 = 1.6 m
5.3.2.1(2)
-~~
-
lo = 0.85 x 6 = 5.1 m

1
.-
\
I
Reference Cakufations"-. Output

beff,l = (0.2 X 1.6) + (0.1 X 5.1) = 0.83 m
0.21 0 = 0.2 x 5.1 = 1.02 m
beffl < b1, 0.210
So beffl = 0.83 m
beff = 0.83 X 2 + 0.3 = 1.96 m
300
Assume that the neutral axis is within the flange. beff = 1:96 m
Eq A.5
K = M/bd2f
ck
6
- (169 x 10 )/
- {(129-0)(392.5) 2 (2~)}
r = 0.022 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
Eq A.6 z = d [o.5 + jco.25- K/1 .134 )]
z = C392.5) [o.5 + j ( 0.25 - 0022I 1.134 )]

l. z = 385 > (0.95)(392.5) = 373 mm;
so take z = 373 mm
z = 373 mm
_ (d - z)/
) x- 0.4
- (392.5 - 373)/
x- 0.4
I.
I
x = 49 mm
x = 49 mm
0.8 x = 39.2 mm
}:.-
Slab thickness is taken as 125 mm, hence, neutral axis is in fact
N.A. is inside
within the flange, and the beam can be designed as a rectangular
beam with b = 1960 mm. the flange
1
M
Eq A.9 A----
s - 0.87fykZ
l.
;
(169 x 10 6 )
=------
(0.87)( 460)(373) As,req = 113 2
= 1132 mm 2 mm 2
Use 2T25 &
Use 2T25 and 1 T20 (A 5 = 1296 mm 2
)
1T20
(1296 mm2)
(sagging)
I
r . ~-, .~
Reference -Calculations - Output

Note 6 Transverse reinforcement in the flange
Design longitudinal shear stress= VEct

Distance from the point of the zero moment to the point of the
Example 7 maximum moment = 2.77 m
)
j'-
11x = l'/z - \}
x --t . J
'
_,
Note 7 !:ix = 2.77 /2 = 1.39 m ' ,-,y

I
I I ..
6.2.4(3) !:iFct/ \- I / \ r
VEct = (hr x !ix) \ -,
\ ( f
/1 ,_
!:iM bro \ . ; ' ~t., --
Appendix B
fiFct = (d - hr/2) x br '
"'
:/ -'T
'-' .
\ .
-
>
!:iM (bf- bw)/2
fiFct = x ----
(d - hr/2) bf
Example 7 !:iM = (121.5)(1.39) - ( 43.79) (1.39) 2 /2
= 126.6 kNm
126.6 x 10 6 (1960 - 300) /2
fiFct = (392.5 - 125/2) x 1960
!if ct = 162.5 kN
3
v - 162.5 x 10 /
Ed - (125 X 1390)
= 0.935 N/mm 2 VEd

= 0.935 N/mm 2
Note 8 To prevent crushing of the concrete strut in the flange
6.2.4(4) VEct :::; y;fcd sin Sr cos ef
6.2.2(6) yJ = 0.6 [ 1 - :~~] = 0.54
6.2.4(4) Take Sf= 26.5 for compression flange
Note 9 vfcd sin ef cos ef = 0.54(0.567)fck sin 26.5 cos 26.5
= 0.54(0.567)(25) sin 26.5 cos 26.5
= 3.06 N/mm 2 > 0.935 N/mm 2 ; hence OK
3.1.6(2) fctct -_ actfctk,o.os;

.
_ (1) (1.8) /
yc -
- 1 2 N/mmz
/ (1.5) -

r
J
. -.
I
. ,
r Reference
2
Calculations Output
i Table 3.1 [fctk,o.os = 1.8 N/mm for fck = 25 MPa]

6.2.4 (6) kfctd = (0.4)(1 .2) = 0.48 N/mm 2 < 0.935 N/mm 2 ;
so extra reinforcement above that for flexure is required .
6.2.4 (4) Asrfyct/ > VEct hr/

Eq 6.21 Sf - cot Sr
A5 r(0.87)(460)/ > 0.935 x 125/

Sf - cot 26.5
(
Asf/sf;:::: 0.146
,
.. /
Note 10 Provide T10@400 mm spacing (196 mm 2 /m)
r
~;~.
Asf/sf = 78.5/ 400 = 0.196;:::: 0.146 ; hence OK Transverse steel

(T10@400 mm)
6.2.4(2) Minimum amount of reinforcement
(196 mmZ/m)
fctm 2.6
9.2.1.1(1) 0.26 fyk btd = 0.26 x 460 x 300 x 392.5
= 173 mm 2 /m
0.0013btd = 0.0013 x 300 x 392 .5 = 153 mm 2 /m
Table 3.1 [ fctm = 2.6 MPa for fck = 25 MPa]
As.prov =196 mm 2/m > 17 3 mm 2/m; hence OK
l
., l Notes on Calculations
3. Chloride free exposure entails mainly carbonation induced corrosion. Chloride environment are
L much more damaging to reinforcement.
4. The minimum cover required for the reinforcement is found based on the safe transmission of
bond force, the protection of steel against corrosion and adequate fire safety. Then an
allowance for deviation of 10 mm is added to get the nominal cover. l'.1Cctev could be reduced
further (Clause 4.4.1.3(3)) ifthe fabrication ofreinforcement is subjected to a quality assurance
system, e.g. where monitoring and/or rejecting non confirming members take place.
-
5. The calculation of effective depth from the overall depth is illustrated by the figure below.
shear link
h d
}
.....__ _ _ __,- =}--cover
L"
6. Transverse reinforcement in flange resists the longitudinal complementary shear stresses that
occur in the flanged section along the interface between the web and flange (see Appendix B).
- 7. In Example 7, points of contra flexure will occur in span BC at two points, namely
i. At support C
ii. At 5.55 m from C along CB
The maximum moment occurs at 2.77 m from C (i.e. 3.22 m from B along BC). !J.x is the
half the distance between the section where moment is zero and the section where moment is
maximum. So from B along BC, !J.x would be 1.39 m {(5.55 - 2.77)/2}. From C along CB
too, 6.x would be 2.77 /2 = 1.39 m. To get maximum shear, the location where !J.x is
minimum should be used.
8. What follows are checks and designs for shear, which is dealt with more comprehensively in
Exan1ples 10 and 11.
9. If we take 8 = 26.5 (the lowest value for compression flanges), we will get the smallest
shear resistance and will hence be conservative.
10. The area of transverse bending steel provided should be greater than that given by Eq 6.21 or
half that given by Eq 6.21 plus that required for transverse bending (Clause 6.2.4(5)).
Concluding Notes
11. When designing beam-slab systems, care must be taken to note where flanged beam action
takes place and where it does not. Furthermore, such locations will be reversed in systems
where upstand beams are used.
12. If the neutral axis of a flanged beam falls within the flange, the design is identical to a
rectangular beam, as seen here.
13. When designing for hogging and sagging moments at support and span respectively, care
must be taken to remember what steel has to be placed at the top of the beam section, and what
steel at the bottom.
~-----
-. I I
I
I
~
v
r
Example 9 - Design of Flanged Section
Design an edge beam of a beam-slab system to take an ultimate moment of 520 kNm at mid span.
Spacing of beams= 4 m; Span of beams= 6.0 m; ..________
Thickness of slab= 100 mm; fck = 25MPa; fyk = 460 MPa.
! Introductory Notes
) I. An edge beam will have a transverse slab only on one side; hence it is called an L-beam. The
beam in the earlier example is called a T-beam, since the slab extended over both sides of the
beam. If the beam is below the slab (as is the case most of the time), the slab will act as a flange
l. only in the span, when the top of the section is in compression, and not at the supports
...., .
.
r
:
Reference . Calcula'tions
. . .- ._.. .. Output
Note 2 Assume that bw = 225 mm bw= 225 mm
I Note 3 Choose h = 450 mm and d = 390 mm h = 450mm
I d = 390 mm
5.3.2.1(3) beff = I beff,i + bw :S b

beff,i = 0.2bi + 0.11 0
l
I..
b 1 -- ( 4 - 0.2 2 5)/ 2 -- 1 .8 9 111
Note 4 10 = 0.70 XI = 0.70 X 6 = 4.2 m

l beff,l = 0.2 X 1.89 + 0.1 X 4.2 = 0.8 m
0.21 0 = 0.2 x 4.2 = 0.84 m
l)
So beff,l = 0.8 m
beff,l < b11 0.21 0
l, beff = 0.8 + 0.225 = 1.025 m ( < 4/2 = 2.0 m)

\.
M (520 x 10 6 ) I
K = /bd 2 fck = / ((1025)(390) 2 (25)}
Eq A.5
K = 0.133
) z =ct [o.5 + j(o.25- K/i. 134)]

Eq A.6
z = (390) [o.5 + j(o.25 - 0. 133; 1 _1 34 )]
).
= 337.1 mm< (0.95)(390) = 370.5 mm
Hence take z = 337.1 mm
j
- (390 - 337.1)/
x- . 0.4
J:
Reference
x = 132.25 mm x = 132 mm
Note 5 0.8 x = 105 .6 mm > 100 mm. So the rectangular stress

block goes outside the flange region, and the neutral axis goes
inside the web region. The above z value is then not valid.
11
r-Jt o 1:!;__ --------------, _ \ r r \ ,,,. \I'll, ) 1
/
-
-:~ ~:J!f IStructE (Mu ~ 0.567fckCbeff - bw)hf(d - 0.5hr)\ . t.~ /

bJ,--- Manual M~ 0.567(25)(1025 - 225)(100)(390 - 0.5(100))
~
1
l ( 5 .4.4.l) M =385.6 kNm \
1.1 ' (r.Jl' j.J ( Note 6 uf \ \, \L,
,,.--'-. M - M ur \- I ,
l
Kr=---
._/ fckbwd 2
(520 - 385.6) x 10 6
Kr= (25)(225)(390) 2
Kr= 0.157 < K' = 0.167; hence no compression
reinforcement is required
Eq A.6 z = C39o) [ o.5 + j( I

0.25 - 0 157 i. 134 )]
z = 325.3 mm
I .
r
385.6 x 10 6 (520 - 385 .6) x 10 6
As= 0.87(460)(390 - 50) + 0.87(460)(325.3) l
As = 2834,+ 1032
As= 3866 mm 2 As,req = 3866
Use 8T25 bars (3928 mm2) mm 2
Use 8T25
Note 7
To provide this reinforcement arrangement h has to be (3928 mm2)
increased further to around 475 mm . (sagging)
9.2.1.1(3) Maximum reinforcement

Note 8 A5 max= 0.04Ac =
0.04 X 225 X 475
= 4275 mm 2 > 3927 mm 2; hence OK
2. A web width of 225 mm is aroW1d the minimum that is practically desirable, in order to
accommodate the reinforcement. A width of 200 mm can be considered as the absolute
minimum for all beams save those which carry very nominal loads. I:

3. The difference between d and h has been taken as 60 mm (for outdoor conditions), whereas it
can be taken as 50 mm for indoor conditions. The actual calculation of cover should be
carried out as in Example 8.
4. It is asswned that the beam considered here is continuous at both ends. So according Clause
5.3 .2.1(2), 10 = 0.701.
5. This trial-and-error approach has to be adopted to find out whether the rectangular stress
block of compressive stress in concrete at failure is within the flange or whether it extends to
the web region.
j
6. The approach here is to find the reinforcement required to balance
(i) The compression in the outstand flange alone, plus
). (ii) The compression in the web (extending a depth of 0.8x over a width of bw)
7. The difference of 60 mm between h and d is based on asswning a single layer of

reinforcement. Since 8T25 has to be provided to resist bending, the beam will contain double
layers of reinforcement, and (h - d) can be taken as 60 + 25 = 85 mm.
8. This check for maximwn percentage ofreinforcement is also almost always satisfied, except
for very heavily reinforced sections. Although the check is satisfied here, care will have to be
exercised iflapping is done. Spacing between bars may also be small.
Concluding Notes
9. This example illustrated the situation where the rectangular compression stress block fell
below the flange of a flanged beam.
10. If compression reinforcement is found to be required, it is recommended in the IStructE

Manual (Clause 5 .4.4.1) that the section be redesigned, so that compression reinforcement
would not be needed.
l
( '
l
J
l
/'.
L
If ,V',
C 1r1_J_..J_ k ! L, t-. Y r /: ._9hvJ' --r

kc ( v' 1
(; . c -r r I e-
- - C,~; i --~ rb '.r (.Q__ f '_I . S . fl.J.J,!''
CHAPTER3
C /-i. r__ c k p~- d J d bv.-
1'J
5 1 (___ i? \.\ 'n r. ~ C.Ld~

1
Design of Beams for Shear 1~

- "",_,__. .- -~
1"
Example 10 - Design of Section for Shear --------- I
(
/!/" . I
I ' I
-
.
'. 1 "'jj
\
,_J;:~:-
A simply supported beam of cross section b = 225 mm and d = 400 mm cifiries.::iail ultimate load
of 100 kN/m over its clear span of 5.0 m. Design the shear reinforcement required near the
support, assuming that the percentage of tension reinforcement at the support is 0.8%. Assume
fck = 25 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
Introductory Notes
1. The two main effects caused by flexure are bending moment and shear. The bending moment in
a concrete beam is carried by steel reinforcement parallel to the beam axis. The shear force is
carried by steel reinforcement in a transverse direction, generally in the form of links.
2. Links normally have diameters varying from 6 to 12 mm, in steps of 2 mm.
Reference Calculations Output ~
Shear check at support : ..
Maximum shear force at the face of the support,

VEf = 250 kN
VEf = (100 x 5)/2 = 250 kN
Crushing strength of the diagonal strut (concrete),
6.2.3(3)
Eq 6.9
fck] = 0.54 = V1
6.2.2(6) v = 0.6 [ 1 - 250
Eq 6.6N fed = 0.567fck
6.2.3(1) z = 0.9d
6.2.3(3) acw = 1 for non prestressed members
' ..
Assume 8 = 22 for uniformly distributed loads
Design of Beams for Shear Page 30

1
,.
r . - -
! .. I Reference Calculations Output
(1.0)(225)(0.9 x 400)(0.54)(0.567)(25)
i. VRd,max =
' (cot 22 +tan 22)
= 215.4 kN < 250 kN; hence not satisfactory.
!
Note 3 Put VRd,max = VEf
.'
r UcwbwZV1fcd Ucwbwzv 1fcd sin 28
I v - =
Ef - (cot 8 + tan 8) 2
8 = 0.5 sin- 1 [ 2VEf ]
- ...
,..
...
)_
-.
- 5 . -1 [
S - 0. Sin
Ucw bwZV1 fcd
2 x 250 x 10
3
(225)(0.9 X 400)(0.54)(0.567)(25)
l
I. 8 = 26.87 8 = 26.87
I
I 22 < 26.87 < 45; hence OK

I.I
6.2.1(8) Check at distance 'd' from the support
(250)(2500 - 400)
VEd =
(2500)
= 210 kN VEd = 210 kN
Design value of shear resistance of the concrete beam

without links
1
). 6.2.2 (1) VRd,c = [CRd,ck(lOOp1fck) h + k1 CYcp] bwd
Eq 6.2.a
with a minimum of
..
) Eq 6.2.b VRd,c = ( Vmin + k1 CYcp)bwd
:
I
I
j
k = 1+ ~. = 1 +): = 1. 71 :5 2.0
_,1 . As1
p1 = bwd = 0.008 :::; 0.02
I'
- 0.18 0.1'8
cRd'. c -- -Ye = - = 0 .12
1.5
l k1 = 0.15
1
vRd,c;::; [co.12)(1.71)(0.8 x 25) h + o] (225)(400)
l. = 50-:-1 kN
VRd,c = 50.1. kN
L Design of Beams for shear Page 31

__ - ~ -.. 1 '-' -z":. .:.: - - "'t, "~ .. ,._ -
Reference '-:;
Cakrifations-
- -_-_ -: ;-_"'! .- . '- :,-:-

3 1 3 1
Note 4 vmin = 0.035k /2fck lz = (0.035)(1.71) iz(25) 12
Eq 6.3N = 0. 39 N/mm 2
Note 5 bw = 225 mm
VEd = 210kN > 5a.1 kN
Note 6 So shear reinforcement is necessary

Asw
Eq 6.8 VRct,s = VE ct = - zfywd cot 8
s
Note 7 Asw 210 X 10 3
74
-s- = {(0.9)( 400)}{(0.87)( 460)} cot(26.87) = 0.
It is asslUTied links are of Tl 0 diameter bars with two

upright arms ( 157 mm 2 )
157
Note 8 -;:::0.74
s
s:::;: 212 mm
So provide T10 at 2ao mm spacing
Note 9
Maximum longitudinal spacing between links
9.2.2(6)
S1,max = 0.75d(1 +cot a:)
Eq 9.6N a = 9a 0 (vertical shear links provided)
Links
S1 max= a.75 X 40a X (1+cot90)
Tla@2aa mm
= 300 mm> 2ao mm; hence OK
Shear reiriforcement ratio

9.2.2(5) Asw
Eq 9.4 Pw=----
(s. bw. sin a)
157
Pw = (2aa x 225 x sin 90) = a.oa 35
(a.as~) (a.a8~
Pw,min = f - = 46 a
Eq 9.5N yk
= a.aaa9 < Pw; hence OK
Additional longitudinal tensile force

6.2.3(7) b.Ftd = a.5VEct(cot8 - cot a:)
Eq 6.18 a = 9a 0 ; vertical links
L'.ffrct = a.5 x 21a cot 26.87 = 2a7 .2 kN l'iFtct = 207.24 kN

Note 10
Design of Beams for shear Page 32

I
f.
L
I I
I !
3. The design of shear reinforcement is done based on a truss model. In this model, it is ensured
j. that the compressive stresses that occur in the diagonal compressive struts do not lead to
I compression failure of the struts. This is why the maximum shear check is done at the support
..
..
of the beam (Clause 6.2.1(8)). According to Clause 6.2.3(2) 8 should lie between
22and 45. So initially assuming 8 = 22,we check whether VRd,max < VEf. If not, we put
VRd,max = VEf, and find 8. If 8 > 45, the diagonal concrete strut is overstressed, so either
(
the beam should be resized or the compressive strength of the concrete increased.
I
I 4. This formulae indicates that the concrete has some shear resistance even without the main
reinforcement.
II
5. For a flanged beam, bwwill normally be the web width .
. ...
!~_'.
/"
,
6. IfVEct < VRd,co it does not mean that shear reinforcement is not required . Minimum shear
I
reinforcement should be always provided in beams according to Clause 9.2.2(5).
I 7. In this truss analysis model, it is taken that all the shear will be resisted by the provision of
shear reinforcement without the contribution of the shear carrying capacity of the concrete
(Clause 6.2.1 (5)).
1 8. When using this inequality for providing links, either the Asw value ors value must be chosen.
In general. the Asw value is assumed and the s value calculated . The Asw value refers to the
total cross section of links at the neutral axis of a section. Generally, it is twice the area of the
chosen bar, since in most cases it is links with 2 ve11ical legs that are used. The resulting s
value should not exceed 0.75d (Clause 9.2.2(6)), to ensure that at least one link crosses a
potential shear crack. The transverse spacing between the legs of a link should be such that it
does not exceed St max= 0.75d:::; 600 mm (Clause 9.2.2(8)).
9. The link spacing is also often specified in steps of 25 mm, because of the tendency to think in
Imperial units (1 inch is approximately 25 mm). It may be better practice to specify in steps of
10 mm, which is economical too.
.. l- .
I 0. This additional longitudinal tensile force is resisted by extending the c':!rtailment point of th~
longitudinal reinforcement (Cla~se 9.2.1.3(2)). ---- --
I
Concluding Notes
t
'
11. In this example, only the shear reinforcement requirement near the support has been
calculated. The requirement close to mid-span will be much less. This aspect will be
considered in the next example.
L
L
L
Example 11 - Design of Beam for Shear
A simply supported beam, with d = 550 mm and b = 350 mm and clear span 6.0 mis subject to
a triangularly varying shear force diagram, with a value of 400 kN at the face of the supports. The
mid span steel consists of 4 Nos. 25 mm bars. Design the shear reinforcement required over the
entire span, if two of the main bars are bent up at 45 near the supports. Take fck = 25 MPa
fyk = 460 MPa. I.
Introductory Notes
1. In this example, the contribution from two bent up bars are also used to provide shear
reinforcement near the beam supports.
.. ;
2. The most reasonable way to provide shear reinforcement for the entire span would be to
consider three areas - i.e.
(i) The support area where bent up bars are also effective in addition to links,
(ii) The middle of the beam, where only minimum links would suffice, and
(iii) The portion in between the above.
Reference
Support area
VEf = 400 kN VEf = 400 kN

Crushing Strength of the diagonal strut (concrete),
CT cw hwZV1 fcd
6.2 .3(3) vRd.max -- (cot 8 + tan 8)
Eq 6.9
Note 3
V fck ] = 0.54 = V1
= 0.6 [1 - 250
Eq 6.6N
fed = 0.567fck = (0.567)(25) = 14.2 N/mm 2
z = 0.9d = (0.9)(550) = 495 mm
acw = 1 for non prestressed members.
6.2 .3(2) 8 = 22 for uniformly distributed loads
a = 45
(1.0)(350)(0.9 x 550)(0.54)(14.2)
VRct,max = (cot 22 +tan 22)
VRd,max
= 460.6 kN = 460.6 kN
> 400 kN; hence there is no crushing of the
diagonal compressive strut (concrete).
6.2.1 (8) Check at distance 'd' from the support
( 400) (3000 - 550)

VEd = . (3000) VEd = 326.7 kN
= 326.7 kN

r

Design value of shear resistance of the concrete beam
without links
1
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [cRct,ck(100p1fck) h -+ k 1acp] bwd
I Eq 6.2.a
with a minimum of
Eq 6.2.b VRd,c = (Vmin + k1 CJcp)bwd
I O'cp = Nect/ Ac = 0
. I.
k =1 + ~ = 1 + Jffi = 1.6 ,;; 2.0
A5 1 2 x 491
- r Note 4 PI = bwd = 350 X 550 = 0.005
0.18 0.18
:5 0.02
6.2.2(1) CRd,c = -- = -1 5 = 0.12

Ye
k1 = 0.15
3 3
vmin = 0.035k /2fc//z = (0.035)(1.6) 12(25//2
Eq 6.3N
= 0.35 N/mm 2
bw = 350 mm
( V 111 in + k1 CJcp)b wd = 67.4 kN

1
vRct,c = [co .12)(1.6)(0.2 x 25) h+ o] (350)(550) VRd c = 67.4 kN
= 62.9 kN < 67.4 kN
VEd = 326.7 kN > 67.4 kN
So shear reinforcement is necessary.
r Shear resistance of two inclined bars (bent up bars)
A5 w = 982 mm 2 (area of 2T25 bars)

I:. 9.2.2(7)
Maximum longitudinal spacing of bent-up bars
S1 max = 0.6d(1 +cot a)
Eq 9.7N
a = 45
l
J
Note 5
S1 max= (0.6)(550)(1 + cot45)
.= 660 mm
,.
1 Hence bent up bars has to be provided at spacing not less
than 660 mm.
Assume bent up bars are provided at a spacing of 660 mm.
1 6.2.3(4) Asw .
VRcts =-zfywd (cot8+cota)sma
Eq 6.13 ' s
z = 0.9d = (0.9)(550) = 495 mm
!. fywd = (0.87) ( 460) = 400 N/mm 2
(491 x 2)
VRd,s == ( 49 5) ( 400) (cot 22 + cot 45) sin 45
L 660
= 724 kN

Reference ".
VEd = 326.7 kN < VRct, 5 (724 kN)
Shear resisted by bent up bars 724.0
. =--> 05
Total shear force 326.7
Although shear resisted by bent up is higher than the

9.2.2(4) design shear force, at least 50% of the shear
reinforcement has to be in the form of links.
So shear force carried by the shear links

= (326.7)(0.5) = 163.4 kN
Asw
6.2.3(3) VRd,s = VEct/2 =-zfywctCOt8
s
Eq 6.8
Note 6 Asw 163.4 X 10 3
-= = 033
s (0.9)(550)(0.87)(460) cot22
It is assumed links are ofT6 bars with two upright arms

(Asw = 56.5 mm 2)
56.5
- = 0.33
s
s = 171.2 mm
So provide T6@150 mm spacing T6@150 mm
9.2.2(6) Maxjmum longHudJ!1al spadng between }jnks

Eq 9.6N S1,max = 0.75d(1 +cot a)
a = 90 (For vertical links)
S1,max = 0.75 x 550 x (1 + cot90)
= 413 mm> 150 mm; hence OK
9.2.2(5) Shear rejnforcement raNo

Eq 9.4 _Asw/
Pw - (s. bw. sin a)
If only the reinforcement ratio of the shear links is
I'
considered.
p =
56.5
= 0.0011
I I
w (150)(350) (sin 90)
(o.os~) (o.osvlzS)
Eq 9.5N Pw,min = ==
fyk 460
= 0.0009 < Pw; hence OK

r
'
r.
l
i I Reference Calcl!.la.tio ns Output
AddUional longitudinal tensile force
From provision of bent up bars

6.2.3(7) LlFrct = 0.5VEct(cot8- cot a)
Note 8 a= 45
!. LlFrct, 1 = (0.5)(163.4)(cot22 - cot45) = 120.5 kN
I.. From the provision of shear links

LlFrct, 2 = (0.5)(163.4)(cot22 - cot90) = 202.2 kN LlFrct,tot =
LlFrct,tot = 120.5 + 202.2 = kN 3.227 kN
Middle Area
Shear force that could be carried by the minimum links.

9.2.2(5) Asw
Eq 9.5N Pw,min = 0.0005 = (s. b w sm. a )
Asw
- = 0.0005 x 350 x sin 90 = 0.175
1 s
(
It is assumed links are of T6 bars with two upright arms
(A 5 w = 56 .5 mm 2 )
I 56.5
- ;:::: 0.175
s 4,.. .
s "fP 323 mm T6@300 mm
So provide T6@300 mm spacing as minimum links
Shear tJiat could be carried by the minimum shear links

1 .
Asw
Eq 6.13 V = -zfywct
s
cot8
L
L V =
56.5
(0.9)(550)(0.87)(460) (cot22)
300
V = 92.3 kN
Hence the extent of area covered by the minimum links
400!1
v = (3.0)
40011
92 .3 = (3.0) ,
11 = 0.69 m
r-- So the
. extent of area is 0.69 .m.
'
9.2.2(6) Maxjmum JongHudjnal spadng between links

f. Eq 9.6N S1,max = 0.75d(1 +cot a)
a = 90 (for vertical links)
l
S1,max-= (0.75)(550)(1+cot90)
: r = 413 mm> 300 mm; hence OK
l Design of Beams for shear Page 37

.- ~ I..-! ,;'" - - - .,
Reference -. ':.1. Calculatiori'
. .
s
- =: ; ... , '. "--:._: - -
.~
-c - ' _ .-~
,t_
-_ ...
output
. -
Area in-between
Extent of this area = 3.0 - 0.69 - 0.66 = 1.65 m

Shear force at distance 660 mm fromth_e support is V 1
v - c400)(3000 - 660)
1
- (3000)
= 312 kN
It is asswned links are of T6 bars with two upright arms

(Asw = 56.5 mm 2 )
3 56.5
312 x 10 ::::; -(0.9)(550)(0.87)(460) cot 22 ' ,
s
s ::::; 89 mm
Note 9 Provide 2/T6@170 mm spacing. 2/T6@170 mm
9.2.2(6) Maxilnum JongHudjnal spadng between Jjnks

Eq 9.6N Si.max = 0.75d(l +cot a)
= (0.75)(550)(1 + cot90)
= 413 mm> 170 mm; hence OK
I
I
2/IOT6 3T6 I
~1 .. ~ I
'
'
'
I
I
I
I
I
4T25 I
0.66 m I 1.65 m
I
~
0.69 m
-
3. Since bent up bars are also used in the support area VRct,max from Equation 6.14 should be
considered. However, putting a = 90 in Equation 6.14 gives the minimwn value of
VRct,max' in fact the value given in Equation 6.9, which is the one used for checking.
I__ ,,
4. Bottom reinforcement comprises 4T25, but near the supports 2 bars have been bent up. So in
calculating the shear resisting capacity of the concrete near the support, only the area of 2T25
bars has been considered as giving the dowel action.
5. Since the bars are bent only at one location in this example, the mcp<imum distance is taken as
that from the face of the support to the point of bending the bars.
6. The links designed can be used from the support up to the point where the main bars are
cranked up. The distance to this point (660 mm) from the support is greater than the distance
'd' (550 mm) at which VEct is computed. Hence the approach is conservative.

r
!
t. . I 7. If small diameter tor steel is not available, mild steel of fyk = 250 MP a will need to be used,
I
r with an appropriate change in Equation 6.8.
I 8. This additional tensile force is not used in any future calculations here, but Example 12 gives
one instance of its use.
I
I 9. If the link spacing is less than around 150 mm, it will be difficult for concreting to be carried
I out. Hence, as in this case, 2 links can be placed together, spaced wider apart. An alternative
(
would have been to use 8 mm diameter links; however fabrication will be easier if links of the
I same dian1eter are used throughout the beam.
I
Concluding Notes
. -.'.. c.. 10. It is not very common practice now to use bent up bars as described in this example, although it
l
I
was in the past. Hence, when only vertical links are used, we find the distance for which the
minimum reinforcement is enough. For the remaining distance, we design links corresponding
to the shear force at a distance 'd' from the face of the support.
\
I
I
\- - ,
I
1, ,, -J I -- ---=-
!-
f,
I I - - ----- -- - - --------~~-~- ---- ./
--~ ~_I -I
} !Yi r ' ,( K__j .
I (-" {f;D .
I / - ------
/
\ \ !'
'..:.'{f l'-" r
:
k
-{,,, '
.
' )
1
I
I.
j.
L
CHAPTER4
Serviceability Checks and Detailing in

Beams
Example 12 - Serviceability Checks and Detailing

Carry out serviceability checks on the beam analysed in Example 7 and designed in Example 8.
Also carry out detailing of reinforcement, including curtailment and lapping.
Introductory Notes
1. The serviceability checks consist of span/effective depth ratio calculations for deflection and
bar spacing rule checks for cracking. If these simplified checks are satisfied, the beam is
"deemed to ~ atisfy" the serviceability limit state requirements.
Reference - r--t "I_'

.1:. ou.mut
Check fo r deflection (Span/depth rules)
Note 2 Consider the span BC;

5.3.2.2(1) Effective span= 6000 mm
t:---
\i
fck = 25 MPa; fyk = 460 MPa I .
I
1.-d.
As,req 1132
7.4.2(2) z.:__(bd = 1960 x 393 = 0.0015 < 0.0025
Note 3 so use p = 0.0025 -
p' = 0
7.4.2(2) Po = .{f';; x 10- 3 = 0.005
7.4.2(2) p <Po; so use Eq 7.16.a

Table 7.4N K = 1.3
Eq7.16.a dK = K [ 11+1.5 K.P'

fckp+ K.(P'
3.2 fck p-1 f']
ctJ: = 1.3 [11 + 1.Sill 0.0025
0.005 (0.005
+ 3.2ill 0.0025 - 1
)'1'] J
~ = 54.6
7.4.2 (2) bw 1960
Note 4 - = - - = 6.53 > 3
b 300
Eq 7.17 310 500As,prov 500 x 1296
Note 5 1 24 1 5
O's f kAs,re = 460 x 1132 = ::::;
Serviceability Checks and Detailing Page 40

r
So allowable span/effective depth
(~) = (54.6)(0.8)(1.24) = 54.16

All. span/
depth= 54.16
all
(dI) actuJ.
=
6000
392 5
= 15.3
(1)
< d
all
; hence OK Act. span/
depth= 15.30;
hence OK
Consider span AB;

Effective span= 2000 mm
I For cantilever with rectangular beam action.

As,req 780
.
~ ~
,~, : r 7.4.2(2) p = bd = 300 x 392 = 00066

p' = 0
Po =ff;; x 10- 3 = 0.005
p >Po; So use Eq 7.16.b
r.
Table 7.4N K = 0.4
Eq 7.16.b d1 = K r11+1.5fup-Po p' + ~i

121 -~~p;;
l [ 0.005 ]
d = 0.4 11 + 1.5ill 0.0066 + 0
1
d= 6.67
310 500A 5 prov 500 x 829

7.4.2(2) - = - - - '- = = 1.22 :::; 1.5
} fykAs,req 460 X 7 41

j.-~ (~) = 6.67 x 1.22 = 8.14
All. span/
all depth= 8.14
) (-d1) act
2000
= - - = 5.09
392. 5
(1)
< -d
all
; hence OK
,
Act. span/
depth= 5.09;
.)
hence OK
Curtailment of bottom reinforcement

1
The bending moment diagram envelope must first be
l Note 6
drawn.
For span BC, the controlling load case is when AB has a
favourable design ultimate load and BC has the
l unfavourable design ultimate load. This has been
considered in Example 7.
l.
L Serviceability Checks and Detailing Page 41
z:
,. . .
Reference ~ . '.~~Icufatj~ns __ . . -ou:tJ?tlt.
.. .. ..
... ...
7kN
43.79 kN/m
22.79kN/~
A19~ x
A B c
1B~--""'--::Z~B-~of 2T25
Bending Moment Diagram .
. ~"j ": : -:_ I t, . ....J
BM 1 - Bending moment diagram :.'.

Figure 9.2 BM 2 - Bending moment diagram after "shift rule" is
applied.
Example 7 For span BC, Mx = (121.5)x - ( 43.79)(x) 2 /2
Mx = 0 atx = 0
Mxis maximum at x = 2.77 m
Mx,max = 168.6 kNm
Mx = 0 at again 5.55 m
Steel at span BC is 2T25 & 1T20. We can consider

curtailing the I T20 bar.
Note 7 M.O .R of continuing bars ( A5 = 982 mm 2 ) can be

shown to be 146.5 kNm.
Putting (121.5)x- (43.79)(x) 2 /2 = 146.5
x = 1.77 m and 3.78 m. ' _)
These are the theoretical cut off points when the tension
induced in steel due to the bending is considered.
However, tension in longitudinal steel is also induced due

to the shear force; this can be incorporated by applying a
shift of the cut off points.
z(cot e - cot a)
9.2.1.3(2) a1 = 2
Note 8
(0.9)(392.5)(cot22 - cot90) x 10- 3
a1 = 2
= 0.44 m
So theoretical cut off points.are
x = (1.77 - 0.44) = 1.33 m
and (3.78 + .44) = 4.22 m

(.
I
' .
I.
Reference Calculation~ Output

. Note 9 The practical cut off points are lbct (anchorage length)
. . .l Figure 9.2 away from theoretical cut off points .
(.
Anchorage length of bottom reinforcement
8 .4.3(2)
j Eq 8.3
8.4.2(2)
Eq 8.2
8.4.2(2) 11 1 = 1, (good bond conditions are assumed, for bottom
i. reinforcement )
: .~ 8.4.2(2) 112 = 1 for cp :::; 32 mm
)" 3.1.6(2) act= 1
Table 3.1 fctk,o.os = 1.8 MPa for fck = 25 MPa;
3.1.6(2) fctd = actfctk,o.os/Yc = 1X1.8/1.5 = 1.2 MPa
I fbct = 2.25 x 1 x 1.2 = 2.7 MPa fbct = 2.7 MPa
For 20 mm bars
!- CYsct = (fyk/Ys)
lb,rqd = (cp/4)(CY 5 ct/fbct) = (20/4){(460/1.15) /2.7}
lb,rqd = 741 mm
8.4.4(1) lbct = a1aza3a4aslb,rqd ~ lb,min
l. Eq 8.4
8.4.4(1)
For anchorage in tension
lb,min > max {0.3lb,rqd; 10; 100 mm)
Eq 8.6 lb min >max {0.3 x 741; 10 X 20; 100 mm)
> max {222; 200; 100 mm)
lb min = 222 mm
). 8.4.4(1) Cct = min{a/2, c1, c} = min{74 mm, 45 mm, 45 mm}

I
= 45 mm
Table 8.2 a 1 = 1 because straight bars
L
I
Note I 0
a 2 = 1- 0.15(cct - cp)/cp = 1- 0.15 (45 - 20)/20
= 0.81
lbct = 1x0.81x1x1x1 x 741 = 600 mm lbct = 600 mm
l
J
[Confinement by transverse reinforcement is neglected as
it is very small. So a 3, a 4, and a 5 are taken as unity]
lbct > lb,min; hence OK
Hence, the practical cut off points are
x = 1.33 - 0.60 = 0.73 m
x = 4.22 + 0.60 = 4.82 m
Length of20 mm bar required = 4.82 - 0.73 Length of 20 mm
bar= 4.09 m
l = 4.09 m

Distances to ends from Bare 5.27 m and 1.18 m.
Curtailment of top reinforcement
Note 11 For support B, the controlling loading case is when spans

AB and BC have the unfavourable and favourable design
ultimate loads respectively.
7 x 1.35 22.79 kN/m
~
Taking moments about C for AC
R8 (6.0) = (7)(1.35)(7.95) + (43.79)(2.0)(7.0)
+(22.79)(6)2/2
Rs= 183.1 kN
My= (7)(1.35)[y - 0.05] + 43.79y 2 /2 - (183.l)[y - 2]
-(43.79 - 22.79) [y - 2]2 /2
My= (9.45)[y - 0.05] + 21 .9y 2 - (183.l)[y - 2]
-(21) [y - 2]2 /2
~w \~'\. BMI BM2
A Bl
BM 1 - Bending moment diagram
Figure 9.2 BM 2 - Bending moment diagram after "shift rule" is
applied.
My= 0 at y = 0 and My = 106 kNm at B
My= 0 again aty = 3.55 m
Steel at support is 2T20 and 1Tl6. We can consider
curtailing the 1Tl6 bar.
Note 7 Moment of Resistance of continuing bars (A 5 =
628.3 mm 2) can be shown to be 91.26 kNm.
Putting (9.45)[y - 0.05] + 21.9y 2 = 91.26
we can obtain y = 1.84 m for span AB.
And from
(9.45)[y- 0.05] + 21.9y 2 - (183.l)[y- 2]
-(21) [y ~ 2]2 /2 = 91.26
we can obtain y = 2.17 m for span BC.

II .
'
I
Reference - . c~l~rifation( . .. '" " Output
These are the theoretical cut off points when the tension
induced in steel due to the bending is considered, but
tension in longitudinal steel is also induced due to the
I
shear force.
Shift in cut off points considering the tension induced

steel due to shear.
9.2.1 .3(2) a 1 = z( cot 8 - cot a) /2
Note 8 (0.9)(392.5)(cot22 - cot90) x 10- 3
a1 = = 0.44 m
2
So theoretical cut off points are
y = 1.40 m and 2.61 m
The practical cut off points are lbct (anchorage length)
away from theoretical cut off points.
Anchorage length for the top reinforcement
8.4.3(2)
l. Eq 8.3
8.4.2(2)
Eq 8.2
! 8.4 .2(2) = 0.7 (poor bond conditions for top reinforcement
T] 1
Figure 8.2 since h > 250 mm)
Note 12
8.4.2(2) T] 2 = 1 for::; 32 mm
3.1 .6(2) act= 1
Table 3.1 fctk,o.os = 1.8 MPa for fck = 25 MPa;
3.1.6(2) fctd = actfctk,o.os/Y c = 1 X 1.8/1.5 = 1.2 MPa
Note 12 fbct = 2.25 x 0.7 x 1.2 = 1.9 MPa fbct = 1.9 MPa
For 16 mm bars
CJ sd = (fyk/Y s)
lb,rqd = (/4)(CY 5 ct/fbct) = (16/4){(460/1.15) /1 .9}
Ib,rqd = 842 mm
8.4.4(1) lb ct = al az a3 a4aslb,rqd ~ lb,min
Eq 8.4 For anchorage in tension
8.4.4(1) Ib,min > max {0.3lb,rqd; 10; 100 mm)
l Ib,min >max {0.3 X 842; 10 X 16; 100 mm)
~. -
> max{253; 160; 100 mm)
Ib,min = 253 mm
I
l
Table 8.2 a 1 = 1 because straight bars
Note 10 a2 = 1-Q.15(Cct - cp)/cp =1-0.15(45 - 16)/16
= 0 73
l
Page 45
L Serviceability Checks and Detailing
Reference
Note 13 lbct = 1 x 0.73 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 842 = 615 mm lbct = 615 mm
>lb min; hence OK
[Confinement by transverse reinforcement is neglected as
it is very small. So a:. 3 , a:. 4 , and a:. 5 are taken as unity]
Hence, the practical cut off points

y = 1.40 - 0.62 = 0.78 m
y = 2.61 + 0.62 = 3.23 m
Length of 16 mm bar required = 3.23 - 0.78 Length of 16 mm
= 2.45 m bar= 2.45 m
Lapping of bars
Note 14 The continuing 2T20 top bars at B can be curtailed at the

point where tension in steel becomes zero closer to B in
span BC and lapped with 2T12 bars (which will anchor
the shear links). Similarly, the continuing 2T25 bottom
bars in span BC can be curtailed at the point where tension
in steel becomes zero closer to B in span AC and lapped
with 2T12 bars.
For top bars, distance of point where tension m

longitudinal steel becomes zero from A 1s 3.99 m
(3.55 + 0.44). This would be the theoretical cut-off
Note 15 point. To find the practical cut-off point, continue the bars
IStructE for an anchorage length ( 48 x bar diameter). Hence, I
.,
l- ~
Manual cut-off point is 3.99 + 0.96 = 4.95 m from A, 1.e. '

~ I - '
- I
(Table 5.25) 4.95 - 2.0 = 2.95 m to the right of B.

L
- \ '
>'_- ,\ ;('
"I-J(" __,
/ ........------ -1- 1 l
l d
[' )
IStructE Lap length = 56 x bar diameter ,r

Manual The lapped 2T12 bars will start (56)(12) =
(Table 5.25) 672 mmbefore the curtailment of the 2T20 bars, i.e.
2.95 - 0.67 = 2.28 m to the right ofB.
For bottom bars, distance of point where tension m

longitudinal steel become zero is (5.55 + 0.44) =
6.0 m. So it is at B. The practical cut-off point would be
IStructE lbct = 36 x 25 = 900 mm distance beyond this. Hence,
Manual it would be (6 + 0.9 - 6) = 0.9 m to the left of B. The
(Table 5.25)
lapped 2T12 bars will start 42 x 12 = 504 mm before
Note 16 the curtailment of the 2T20 bars, i.e. 0.9 - 0.5 = 0.4 m
to the left of B.
Detailing arrangements at support C and end A

The support at C is designed as simple supported, so the
sagging moment is zero. So the stress in steel is only
caused by shear.

.
I
I I.
1 - .
Reference Calculations
. -,:.:.>-( --:.- .
. 01:1tput
6.2.3(7) flFtct = 0.5VEct (cot 8 - cot a)
Eq 6.18 VEct =the maximum reaction at C
The reaction is maximwn when span BC carries the
unfavourable load combination and span AB the
favourable one.
7 kN 43 7 k I
22 .79 kN/m / N m
'
..
:~: '/
j
~
I
'
Moment about B
Rc(6.0) = ( 43.79)(6) 2 /2 - (22.79)(2.0)(1.0)
- (7)(1.95)
Re = 121.5 kN
VEct = 121.5 kN
). flFtct = 0.5VEct(cot 22 - cot 0) = 150.4 kN
A 5 = 402 mm 2 (2T16)
Considered that 2T16 bars are provided at the simply 2T16 at simply
! supported end . supported end
9.2.1.4 Stress in steel = flFtct/ A5 = 150.4 X 10 3 / 402
= 374N/mm 2
I < 0.87fyk; hence OK
}
I Note 7 Moment carrying capacity of2T16 bars is 60.0 kNm. 2T16 for restraint
Example 7 Maximum span moment= 168.6 kNm moment
..
l. 9.2.1.2(1) 15 % ofmaximwn span moment= 0.15
= 25.3 kNm
x 168.6
Note 17
). So 2T16 can resist the moment of 25.3 kNm.
Example 8 Bottom reinforcement area at the span= 1296 mm 2
r 9.2.1(4) Required bottom reinforcement at end supports

= 1296 /4 = 324 mm 2 < 402 mm 2 ; hence OK
At the end of the cantilever (Point A), sagging moments

) and shear forces are zero and hogging moment is also
j
zero. The required anchorage length is then the minimum

l 8.4.4(1) anchorage length, lb.min = 200 mm for 0 = 20 mm .
(
- Eq 8.6 This can easily be provided by bending the bars .
L
Reference Calculations .. Output
1T16
2T20 2T20 2T20
1.-----1
. -( 7- ....
-- 7 - ,- - , : _
2TI 2
'U2TI 6
2T25
2Tl2 1'2T25
1T20
2Tis1'
A B c
Crack width check (Bar spacing rules)
Table 7.IN For external environment, exposure class XC3 and for
reinforced concrete, quasi permanent combination of
actions should be used.
Allowable crack width is 0.3 mm
Note 18 For office, domestic and residential areas, the stress in
steel is
fyk Gk+ 0.3Qk
f - ----------
5 - 1.15 (l.35Gk + 1.5Qk)8
460 16.88 + 0.3 x 14
fs = 1.15 (1.35 X 16.88 + 1.5 X 14)(1)
f5 = 193 N/mm 2
Table 7.3 N Since the stress is close to 200 N/mm 2 , maximwn Maximwn
Note 19 allowable clear spacing is 250 mm. allowable spacing
Clear cover provided = 35 mm 250mm
Assume link diameter of 6 mm
Considering the support section (tension on top),

Clear spacing between top bars (2T20 & 1 T16)
{300 - (2)(35) - (2)(6) - (20 + 20 + 16)}/ 2
= 81mm
{If middle (16 nm1) bar is curtailed, clear spacing
= 178 mm.}
The top spacing at the support and the spacing when the ~
middle bar is curtailed is less than 250 mm; hence OK
8.2(2) The minimum clear distance

Note 20 = max{k 1 x ; dg + k 2 ; 20 mm}
= max{l x 20 = 20 mm; 20 + 5 = 25 mm; 20 mm} Minimwn
= 25 mm < 81 mm; hence OK allowable spacing
25mm

,
'
.' .; r: ~ ',,... -
!
-
!. I.
Reference C!{lc~fa.#9.P~ t:.
'
. .....-. . _ .. , ,QutpJ1t
\. Considering the span section (tension on bottom),

I Clear spacing between bottom bars (2T25 & 1T20)
= {300 - (2)(35) - (2)(6) - (25 + 25 + 20)}/2
= 74mm
l : If middle (20 mm) bar is curtailed, clear spacing= 168
mm.
The bottom spacing near mid span and the spacing when
l the middle bar is curtailed is less than 250 mm; hence OK
8.2(2) The minimum clear distance

j = max{k 1 x cp; dg + k 2 ; 20 mm}
= max{l x 25 = 25 mm; 20 + 5 = 25 mm; 20 mm}
..
r . = 25 mm< 74 mm; hence OK
2. It is assumed that the column dimension is similar to the width of the beam. So the effective
span becomes the distance between the centers of the supports (Clause 5.3.2.2(1)).
) 3. It is better to put 0.25% of reinforcement as a lower limit in deflection calculations for Sri
Lankan practice. There will also be some bars on the compression face in beams, in order to
l anchor the shear links; neglecting them is conservative.
4. For flanged sections where the ratio of the flange breadth to the rib width exceeds 3, the values
of (I/ d) given by Expression 7.16 should be multiplied by 0.8.
I.
5. Expressions (7.16) are for a steel service stress of 310 MPa (corresponding roughly to
fyk = 500 MPa). Where other stress levels are used, the value obtained by using Equations
1.. 7.16 should be multiplied by 310/a5 , subject to a maximum factor of 1.5 (SLNA Table
NAS).
I
l
J 6. If the structure is simple, instead of drawing the entire bending moment envelope, the
controlling loading cases for each situation can be considered. Where_ the span BC is
J concerned, the controlling case will be that wruch causes the points of contraflexure to be as
close as possible to the supports B and C.
I
J
7. Tills calculation is done as in Example 1. The beam is under-reinforced.
8. The bending moment diagram is srufted by a 1 on each side of the maximum bending moment,
l to take into account the additional tensile force induced in the longitudinal steel due to shear.
Taking 8 = 22 is conservative.
f
l'
9. The bar to be curtailed must be properly anchored. This can be achieved by ensuring that the
gradually reducing moment of resistance over the distance of lbct is always greater than the
imposed bending moments (Figure 9.2). More conservatively, as in this example, the bar can
be curtailed a distance of lbct beyond the theoretical cut off points (Clause 9.2.1.3(3)). The
anchorage lengths vary depending ~on the surface characteristics of the reinforcement, yield
strength, bond conditions, concrete cover and the confinement provided by transverse
reinforcement. The anchorage length check as per Figure 9.2 may become critical when
curtailing support steel, because hogging moments change rapidly along the length of a beam.
10. The cover value taken is that to the main reinforcement, and not to the links.
11. The controlling loading case for the hogging moment steel at support B is that which produces
the maximum moment at B, while causing the point of contraflexure closer to B in the span
BC to be as far as possible from B.
12. For bottom reinforcement the bond conditions are taken as good but for top reinforcement as
poor. This is because, compaction is good at the bottom of a section but poor at the top. ' '
13. Instead ofthis calculation, anchorage length could be easily found using the Table 5.25 of the
I ,
IStructE Manual. From this table the anchorage length for good bond condition and f ck =
25 MPa, is 36 = 36 x 20 = 720 mm. Even though this is obtained by using a factor of
0.9 for confinement by links, the IStructE Manual value is conservative and can be used for
routine calculations. For a 16 mm top reinforcement bar, the IStructE Manual anchorage
length is 48 x 16 = 768 mm.
14. The continuing bars at the top (2T20) and the bottom (2T25) can be lapped with smaller
bars, when the former are no longer required to carry tensile stresses. At least two bars are
required at any section for anchoring the shear links. The minimum diameter for such bars
will be around 12 mm, so that the reinforcement cage will have adequate stiffness during
erection.
r I
15. Here, for the anchorage length and lap length calculations, the conservative values from Table
L~
5.25 of the IStructE Manual is used for convenience. Instead of this, the lap length could also
be calculated more accurately using Clause 8.7.3.
L
16. In general, lapping should not be done at supports, since colw1111 or wall reinforcement will
add to reinforcement congestion.
17. In monolithic construction, even when simple supports have been assumed in design, the '.J
section at supports should be designed for a partial fixity of at least 15% of the maximum ' .
i I
bending moment in the span, and reinforcement of at least 25% of that in the span provided.
18. The quasi permanent combination of actions is used for long term effects and the appearance
of the structure (Clause 6.5.3(2) of EN 1990:2002 (E)). The stress in the steel for office,
domestic and residential areas is obtained by putting '-Vz = 0.3 (Table Al .1 of EN 1990:2002
fyk C Gk+o. Qk )o; o is the redistribution ratio,
= 1.15 3
(E)) and hence f5 equal to unity in this
l.35Gk+l.5Qk
example, since no redistribution has been carried out.

r
!.
19. According to Clause 7.3.3(2), if the minimum reinforcement given by Cl<:tuse 7.3.2 is
provided, crack widths are unlikely to be excessive, if either the provisions of Table 7 .2N or
Table 7.3N are satisfied. The minimum reinforcement given in Equation 9.1N is generally
greater than the minimum reinforcement given in Clause 7.3.2 (Equation 7.1), ifthere is no
axial tension in the element and if the flange width is more than 800 mm in width. In this
example both conditions are satisfied; hence the minimum reinforcement given by Equation
9 .1 N is taken as the minimum reinforcement, and this check is executed in Example 8. The
minimum area of reinforcement is provided so that the reinforcement will not yield when the
concrete in the tension zone cracks and sudden transfer of stress to the reinforcement occurs,
leading to development of a few wide cracks.
20. The minimum clear spacing requirement has to be satisfied, so that the concrete can be
compacted satisfactorily for the development of adequate bond.
"'\'
Concludi ng Notes
21. If the "deemed to satisfy" serviceability checks are not satisfied, the more accurate
calculations for deflection (Clause 7.4.3) and crack width (Clause 7.3.4) can be used to find
out whether the requirements are met.
,.
I
I .
J
I
CHAPTER 5
Design of Slabs
Example 13 - One Way Slab (Continuous)

A slab which has several continuous spans of 5 mis to carry an imposed load of 3 kN /m2 as a one
way spanning slab. The loading from partitions and finishes can each be considered equivalent to
a uniformly distributed load of 1 kN /m 2. Talcing the density of reinforced concrete to be 25 r,
kN/m3, fck = 20 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa, design a typical interior panel.
Introductory Notes
I '
1. A slab is similar to a beam in that it is a flexural member. It is different to a beam in that it is a
two dimensional element, as opposed to being one dimensional.
2. Where the loadings from light partitions are not accurately known, it is reasonable to assume a
udl value of 1 kN/m 2. Furthermore, partitions whose positions are not known should be
treated as additional imposed load. The imposed load value specified in this example
corresponds to that for a school building. Imposed loads assumed for office buildings and
domestic buildings vary between 2 to 3 kN/m 2 and 1.5 to 2 kN/m 2 respectively. Further
guidance can be obtained from Section 6.3 of "EN 1991-1-1 :2002 (E)- Actions on structures -
Part 1-1 : General actions-Densities, self weight, imposed loads for buildings".
Reference Output
Slab thickness
Note 3 In order to choose a slab thickness, assume (span/

effective depth) of 35 (for a continuous one way slab).
Hence, effective depth = 5 x 10 3/35 = 143 mm
Note 4 Cover is assumed to be 25 mm for slabs. I I

L ,
Assuming bar diameter to be 10 mm, choose -
Note 5 h =170 mm and d = 170 - 25 - 10/2 = 140 mm h = 170 mm
d = 140 mm
,_,I'
Note 6 Loading (for 1 m wide strip)
Self load = (0.170)(1)(25) = 4.25 kN/m

Finishes = (1.0)(1) = 1.00 kN/m
Total dead load = 5.25 kN Im (gk)
Imposed load = (3.0)(1) = 3.00 kN/m
Partitions. = (1.0) (1) = 1.00 kNlm
I
Total imposed load = 4.00kN Im (qk)
Design of Slabs Page 52

I
1.
f . o C : ::, ..-" . .:,. .
Reference _ output:/'
Design load= (1.35)(5.25) + (1.5)(4.0) = 13.10 kN/m Design udl =
13.10
Ultimate bending moments and shear forces kN/m-length/m-
width
IStructE Since gk > qk; and loading is substantially uniform;
Manual and if there are at least three spans not differing in length
(Table 5.2) by more than 15% of the longest span,
Span moment= (0.063)F.l = (0.063)(13.10)(5.0) 2
= 20.6 kNm/m
Support moment=(-0.063)F.l = (-0.063)(13.10)(5.0) 2 Mspan = 20 .6
kNm/m-width
= -20.6 kNm/m
Msupport = 20.6
Shear at support = (0.5)F = (0.5)(13.10)(5.0)
kNm/m-width
= 32.75 kN/m
v = 32.75
Design for bending at the span kN/m-width
K' = 0.167
Appendix A.2
I
Eq A.5 Now, K = M/bct2f
r. ck
c20.6 x 10 6 ) /
K= I {(1000)(140) 2 (20)}
K = 0.053 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
J. Eq A.6 z= d [o.s + j(o.zs- Kfi. 134)]

z = (14o) [ o.5 +j( I
0.25 - o.o 53 i. 134 )]
/.
z = 133 mm= (0.95)(140)
So take z = 133
Eq A.9 As = M/ (0.87fykz)
l _ 20.6 x10 6
-
I
0.87 x 460 x 133
= 387 mm 2
Hence use T10@200 mm (393 mm 2 /m) Span steel
T10@200 mm
I.
Cone Soc Half of this can be curtailed at 0.2l, i.e. 0.2 x 5.0 = 1.0
1. Detailing m from the centre line of support. Then
(Figure 10) reinforcement will be T10@400 mm
Note 7 (196 mm 2 /m).
)
l
L Design of Slabs Page 53
.~ . .. Output
Check/or minimum reinforcement
f
- 9.2.1.1(1) As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 ctm btd but not less
fck
than 0.0013btd
0.26 f;tm btd = 174 mm 2 / m
yk
0.0013btd = 182 mm 2 /m
Table3.l [ fctm = 2.2 MPa]
Minimum reinforcement provided = 196 mm 2 /m;
hence OK
9.2.1.1(3) Check for maximum reinforcement
100A 5 / _ (100)(393) / - 0 23 < 4

Ac - / (1000)(170) - ' I ,
I
hence OK
9.3.1.1(3) Maximum spacing
Note 8 Smax,slabs = 3h ~ 400 mm

3h = 3 x 170 = 510 mm > 400 mm
So allowable maximum spacing = 400 mm
Actual maximum spacing = 400 mm; hence OK
Note 9 Check for deflection
Effective span= 5000 mm

fck=20 MPa; fyk = 460 MPa ,
7.4.2(2)
As,req 387
P = bci = 1000 x 140 = 0 00276 1~ 0 ~ 5
:>
Note 10 p' = 0
7.4.2(2) Po = ~ x 10- 3 = 0.0045 ~ p;
so use Eq 7. 16. a
Table 7.4N K = 1.5

3 ' J
7.4.2(2) d = K 11+1.5\tfckp + 3.2\f fck p - 1 /2]

I [ r-;:Po "'(Po )
Eq 7.16.a 3
I [ 0.0045 (0.0045
d = 1.5 11+1.5YZo 0.0028 + 3.2YZo 0.0028 - 1
) /zl
I
d= 42.83
7.4.2(2) 310 500A 5 prov 500 x 393

- = ' = = 1.1 < 1.5
Eq 7.17 O's fykAs,req 460 X 387

t
_,,..
y::r
)-i
. .
l _{... ..... s}\- (;---
c ,i r / r~ (. ,;/ 'h () ~~( z ..
r r = = = = = = r = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =./7
;;:f=
"/= = = = r = = = =
, = = = s C;-~- ~
Refere nee Calcula.tion.s _ . ; / . . 0 utpu t _,..,,'1 t: .i
/
So allowable span/effective depth /
I
(dI) all
= 42.83 x 1.10 = 47.1 > ~.
40 ,. (~) all = 47.1
(dI) act
= 5000
140
= 35.71 < 40; hence OK (~) act = 35.71
Deflection OK
Design for bending at the support
Since the bending moment and effective depth at the

support is identical to that of the span the steel provided
~--~
r
I
Cone Soc
Detailing
will be also can be identical. So use T10@200 mm
spacmg. Support steel
(Figure 10) T10@200 mm
Note 7 Half of this steel can be curtailed at 0.151 (0.15)(5) = =
0.75 m from the face of the support (No'te: lbct 67 = =
Note 11 670 mm), and all the steel is curtailed at (0.3)1 = (0.3)(5)
= 1.5 m from the face of support.
!.
Check for shear
I Design value of shear resistance of the concrete slab

without links
1
h + k1 O'cp] bwd
l 6.2.2(1)
Eq 6.2 .a
VRd,c = [ CRct,ck(lOOp1fck)
with a minimum of
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = ( Vmin + k1 O'cp)bwd
I Eq 6.2.b
O'cp = NEct/ Ac = 0
~
00
I. 6.2.2(1) k =1+ - = 1 + -140 = 2.2 $
.
2.0
As1
Note 12 PI = bd = 0.0023 :5 0.02
,f w
0.18 0.18
CRd = - - = - - = 0.12
,c Ye 1.5
1 6.2. 2(1) kl = 0.15
-
Vmin - 0.035k 2fck
3/ l!z
l 1
= 0.035 x 2 /z x 20 /z
= 0.44 N/mm 2
3
bw = 1000 mm
l (vmin + k10'cp)bwd = 61.6 kN/m
= [c~.12)(2)(0 . 23 x h + o] (1000)(140) x 10- 3
1
VRct,c 20)
= 55.9 kN/m ':/> 61 .6 kN/m
L
Hence take VRd,c = 61.6 kN/m
6.2.1(4) VEct = 34.6 kN/m < 61.6 kN/m VEct = 34.6 kN/m
Note 13 So shear reinforcement is not necessary. < 61.6 kN/m
Shear r /f not
Secondary reinforcement necessary
9.3.1.1(2) Secondary reinforcement of 20% of the principal

reinforcement has to be provided.
Secondary reinforcement = 387 x 0.2 = 77.4 mm 2 /m , I
T10@1000 mm spacing is enough, but the maximum

spacing rule governs
9.3.1.1(3) Smax,slabs,sec = 3h :::; 400 mm (to suit all areas) : ' ..
3h = 3 x 170 = 510 mm$. 400 mm
So maximum spacing = 400 mm
Provide T10@400 mm as secondary reinforcement Secondary
reinforcement
T10@400 mm
--
1
0.75m 0.75m 0.75m 0.75m
Tl0@200 Tl0@400 TI 0@400 TI O(Ql200
Tl0@400
Note 14
j i r 10@400 T l 0@200 T IO@.mo iii I
I.Om I.Om
5.0m
I
3. Although the bending moment is the controlling factor in the choice of depth for beams,
where slabs are concerned, the controlling factor is the span/depth ratio, representing the
check for deflection. A trial value has to be used initially and a value of around 35 is a . ,.
reasonable estimate for lightly loaded one way continuous slabs; this should be reduced to
around 30 for heavily loaded slabs. A lightly loaded slab would have an imposed load of
around 4 kN/mZ, while a heavily loaded slab would have one of around 10 kN/m 2 . I I
4. Cover is determined based on exposure class XCl (Table 4.1) and bond requfrements (Clause
4.4.1 ). The resulting slab has 3 hours of fire resistance (h > 150 mm & a > 30 mm - see Table ' 1.
5.1 of IStructE Manual).
5. Slabs are generally designed such that shear links are not required; hence, no allowance need
be made for link diameter. For typical indoor slabs in non-chloride dry environments, a cover
of 25 mm is satisfactory. Detailed calculation of the cover requirement is given in Example 8.
6. One way and two waY. slabs are generally designed - i.e. loads evaluated and reinforcement
calculated - on the basis of a strip of unit width (e.g. 1 m wide) . Hence the udls calculated here
strictly have units of kN/m-length/m-width . The bending moments and shear forces

calculated subsequently are "perm-width".
:. 7. Although 60% of the steel can be curtailed, in practical slabs, curtailing 50% is easier,
because every other bar can be curtailed. The curtailing rules are taken from "How to design
concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Detailing (Figure 1O)", by the Concrete Centre (2006).
8. Where 50% of steel is curtailed, the critical bar spacing rule will be 3h ~ 400 mm in the
area with curtailed steel, although the rule for 100% steel (in the area of maximum moment) is
2h ~ 250 mm (Clause 9.3.1.1(3)).
9. The assumption regarding span/depth ratio must be checked as early as possible in the design.
Hence span moments should be designed for first and the deflection check made soon after.
10. It is better to put 0.25% of reinforcement as lower limit in deflection calculations for Sri
Lankan practice, although the actual reinforcement is less than that. In addition, a maximum
upper limit of 40 for span/ effective depth should also be imposed in one way continuous
slabs, because Eq 7.16 can give unreasonably high values.
11. The anchorage length check is not very critical for sagging moment steel, but could be for
hogging moment steel. The value of 67 is obtained by extrapolating the IStructE Manual
Table 5.24 value to the fck = 20 MPa condition by factoring the fck = 25 MPa value
2
by (25/20) h, i.e. 58 x (25/20/h = 67. The index 11
2/3 11
is based on Table
3.1 of the fctm expression in EC2.
/. 12. The area of steel used here is that of the top (tension) steel at the support.
13. In general, apart from some cases in flat slabs, it is sought to avoid shear reinforcement in
slabs. Hence, if VRct,c ":/> VEct' the slab thickness is increased. This should always be borne in
mind, and perhaps an approximate check for shear made early in the design, especially if the
slab is heavily loaded (e.g. with a water load).
14. Where the curtailment of steel is concerned, the distances corresponding to top steel are given
J from the face of the support and those to bottom steel from the centre-line of support.
I
Concluding Notes
15. The crack width check is not necessary, if the slab is less than 200 mm in thickness and
provisions of Clause 9.3 have been applied, according to Clause 7.3.3(1). -
16. Although it is quite easy to satisfy minimum steel requirements and maximum bar spacing
!. rules at critical sections (such as mid span and support), care should be taken to ensure that the
above checks are not violated after curtailment of reinforcement.
17. The simplified approach to the design of slabs, using the IStructE Manual (Table 5.2) can be
used in most practical situations. Such an approach is given for the design of continuous
beams as well, in Table 5.12 of the IStructE Manual. The coefficients in this latter table are
higher than those for.slabs, because the slab coefficients are based on the less stringent single
load case of all spans loaded, with support moments redistributed downwards by 20%.
Design ofSlabs Page 57

L
Example 14 - One Way Slab (Simply Supported)
A garage roof in a domestic building is to function as an accessible platform, surrounded by a

parapet wall; the slab is supported on two parallel 225 mm brick walls, the clear distance between
walls being 3.5 m. Design the slab, taking fck = 25 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa and density of
reinforced concrete = 25 kN/m 3 .
Introductory Notes
I. This example has more unknowns than the previous one. It describes a "real" situation, where
design assumptions will have to be made. The imposed load and load from finishes and parapet
wall have to be assumed and a decision taken regarding the end fixity of the slab.
2. The imposed load could be taken as 1.5 kN/mZ, since it is a domestic building [EN
1991-1-1 :2002 (E) Section 6.3 imposed load for floors of domestic building could be taken as
1.5 kN/m 2 to 2.0 kN/m 2]. The finishes (on both top surface and soffit) can be assumed to be a
uniformly distributed load of 1 kN /mZ.
3. The parapet wall which is constructed on the slab perpendicular to its span will give a degree of
fixity to the slab. However, the most conservative approach is to idealize this slab as a one way
simply supported slab. Any fixing moments caused by the above partial fixity can be
accommodated by taking 50% of the mid span steel into the top face of the slab at the support.
4. The parapet wall parallel to the span will have to be carried by the slab. It can be assumed that
the wall is 1.0 m high and 120 mm thick and that the density of the (brick) wall is 23 kN/m 3 .
The load from this wall will be distributed only over a limited width of the slab, as given in the
IStructE Manual (Figure 5. I).
Slab thickness
Note 5 Approximate span= 3500 mm

Note 6 Assuming span/effective depth ratio of30 (for a simply
supported one way slab),
effective depth= (3500)/(30) = 117 mm
Note 7 If we take cover= 35 mm for external exposure class - -,

Table 4.4 XC3, and bar diameter= 10 mm,
Table 4.4N we can choose
Note 8 h = 160 mm and d = 160 - 35 - 10/2 = 120 mm h = 160 mm
BS EN 1992- 1-2 Note: 160 mm> 80 mm (one hour of fire resistance); d = 120 mm
(Table 5.8) hence OK
5.3 .2.2 Hence, effective span = lesser of
(3500+~~)\= 3725 mm or Eff. span=
(3500+-160)l 3660 mm 3.66m
Design of Slabs , _ 1 ; ,.. , P1age 5 8

'I_ ,' fr J '
; .- [ l
) .
J ~ -
(._f
I Reference .. ._:;: s r.<- ;, : -~- ; __

'7 -
-
_ , _.,__- .
_r>a
-
\.,;..
1c. . u. lati._o: n's~.
;- : ~; -~ ' ,; , - - ~ '
.
. ~-:_~-.- - ~, . _ Output
.~ '.-. -
. .._
Loading (for I m wide strip)
Self load = (0.16)(1)(25) = 4.00 kN/m

Finishes = (1.0) (1) = 1.00 kN Im
Total dead load = 5.00 kN Im
Imposed load = (1.5)(1) = 1.50 kN/m
I Design load= (1.35)(5.00) + (1.5)(1.5) = 9.0 kN/m Design udl = 9.0
I kN/m
IStructE
Strip carrying parapet wall = (0.3)(3.660) + 0.12
Manual
(Figure 5.1) = 1.22 m
I Additional dead load in that area =
:
:::. ~ Note 9 (1.0)(0.12)(23) / (1.22) = 2.26 kN/m
1-
I Ultimate bending moment and shear force
Since we assume the slab to be simply supported,

wl 2 (9)(3.66) 2
Note 3 Mid span moment = S = = 15.1 kNm Mspan = 15.1
8
kNm/m
/.
wl (9) (3.66)
Shear force at support= Z =
2
= 16.5 kN V = 16.5 kN/m
I Design for bending

Appendix A.2
I
I
Eq A.5 K' = 0.167
Now, K = M/bd 2 f
ck
(15.1 x 10 6 ) /
K= I {(1000) (120) 2 (25)}
= 0.042 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
[ ..
z =ct [o.5 + jco.25 - Kfi. 134)]

Eq A.6
z= c120J [o.s + J(o.2s - o.o42/u34)]
z = 115.4 mm$ (0.95)(120) = 114 mm
So take z = 114 mm
i. Eq A.9
As= M/co.87fykz)
_ 15.1 x10 6 ;
-
.
0.87 x 460 x 114
( = 331 mm 2
Hence use T10@230 mm (341 mm 2 /m)
L
Page 59
L Design of Slabs
'
Reference . Calcufati'ons
-; . :i~- :: :~o:~;- .. -.'..-- '.''-~ -~-. . . - - . ~ -
However, bar spacmg as well as nummum steel

requirement will be violated if bars are curtailed.
9.3 .1.2(1) (Assuming 50% of the bars are curtailed)
Note 10 Hence, use T10@200 mm (As= 393 mm 2/m)
Spacing after curtailment = 400mm.
T10@400 mm (196 mm2/m) span steel
T10@200 mm
92.1.1(1) Check for minimum reinforcement
f
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 fctm btd but not less
ck
than 0.0013btd
0.26 fctm btd = 176 mm 2/ m
fyk
0.0013brd = 156 mm 2/m
Table 3.1 [ fctm = 2.6 MPa J
Minimum reinforcement provided= 196 mm 2/m;
hence OK
9.2.1.1(3) Check/or maximum reinforcement
100A 5 / _ (100)(393) /
Ac - / (1000)(160)
= 0.246 < 4; hence OK

9.3.1.1(3) Maximum .spacing
Smax,slabs = 3h s; 400 mm
3h = 3 x 160 = 480 mm > 400 mm
Actual maximum spacing= 400 mm; hence OK c I
Cone Soc Half the steel can be curtailed at face of the support.
Detailing
(Figure 10)
Reinforcement at the support
' J
9.3.1.2(2) Maximum moment in span= 15.1 kNm
15% of the span moment= 0.15 x 15.1 = 2.27 kNm
This can be carried by the curtailed bottom reinforcement,
i.e. T10@400 mm spacing. At support
The continuing 50% of bottom steel could be taken into T10@400 mm
the support and bent back into the span as top steel to
extend a distance (0.2)1 = (Q.2)(3660) = 732 mm,
9.3.1.2(2) from the face of the support
Note 11

(
I
I
1
Reference Calc_tilations Oritpu!
Check for deflection
I. Effective span= 3660 mm
1: fck=25 MPa; fyk = 460 MPa
! ..
,. Asreq 331
7.4.2(2) p = bct= 1000 x 120 = 0.0028 ;::: 0.0025
Note 12 p' =0
Po = fu x 10- 3 = 0.005 > p;
. If
.... so use Eq 7.16.a
I
.
rt '
Table 7.4N K = 1.0
dI = K [11 + 1.5-y~Po + 3.2y~(Po

3
I
7.4.2(2) fck p
fck p- .1) /zl
Eq 7.16.a 3
I [ 0.005
d = l.O 11 + l.Sv'25 0.0028
( 0.005
+ 3 2,/25 0.0028 - 1
) /2]
I
d= 35.5
7.4.2(2) 310 500A 5 prov 500 x 393

Eq 7.17
- = ' = = 1.29 < 1.5
05 fykAs,req 460 X 331
I .
So allowable span/effective depth Lr
I
-
( _di) all = 35.5 x 1.29 = 45.8 -;>' 35\

\____../
(-dI) act
3660
= - - = 30.5
120
< 35; hence 0. K Deflection OK
Check for shear
Design value of shear resistance of the concrete slab

without links
I
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [ CRd,ck(lOOp1fck) lh + k1 CTcp] bwd
I Eq 6.2.a
I ' with a minimum of
..J
Eq 6.2.b VRd,c = ( Vmin + k1 CTcp)bwd
!.
\
[ CTcp = Ned/ Ac = 0
t
{ .
6.2.2(1) k = 1
/20o
+ ~d- = 1
/20o
+ ~120 = 2.29 $ 2.0
l.
As1 393
PI = bwd. = 1000 x 120 = 0.0033 :5 0.02
t ,'

Reference . I>
0.18 0.18
CRdc = - - = - - = 0.12
. Ye 1.5
k1 = 0.15
3 1
Vmin = 0.035k /zfck /z
3 1
= 0.035 x 2 /z x 25 /2
= 0.49 N/mm 2
.. bw = 1000 mm
( Vmin + k1 CTcp)bwd = 58.8 kN/m
vRd,c = [co.12)(2)(0.33 x 2s/h + o] (1000)(120) x 10- 3
= 58.2 kN/m < 58.8 kN/m
Hence take VRct,c = 58.8 kN/m
VEct = 16.5 kN/m < 58.8 kN/m
6.2.1(4) So shear reinforcement is not required. Shear OK
Secondary reinforcement
9.3.1.1(2) Secondary reinforcement of 20% of the principal

reinforcement has to be provided.
Secondary reinforcement = 331 x 0.2 = 66.2 mm 2 /m,
i.e. T10@1180 mm spacing , but the maximum spacing
rule governs
Sm ax, sl a bs, se c = 3h :::;; 4 00 mm
9.3.1.1(3) Secondary
3h = 3 x 160 = 480 mm > 400 mm
So maximum spacing = 400 mm reinforcement
So provide T10@400 mm as secondary reinforcement T10@400 mm
Note 13
Note:- It can be shown that the , spacmg of the
Note 14
reinforcement in the edge strips of 1.22 m should be
T10@170 mm at mid span (and hence T10@340 mm at
supports).
' -
Tl0@400 Tl0@400 r-\-
I
11 -
0.73 m 0.73 m
T10@4 00
. . .
T1 0@2 00
I I
-
f
-~
l\_J~----::--::----~
0.225 m
3.5 m
-
0.225 m
5. In order to use Clause 5.3.2.2(1) to find the effective span, the clear distance between supports
is taken as a first approximation of the span.
6. For a lightly loaded one-way simply supported slab, a span/depth ratio of around 26 to 30
may be assumed. This should be reduced to around 24 for a heavily loaded slab.
r
I
7. This slab is exposed to the external environment, so an exposure class XC3 is used (Table
4.1 ). Cover is selected based on exposure class and bond requirement. The resulting slab has 2
hours of fire resistance (h > 120 mm & a = 40 mm - see also Table 5 .1 of the IStructE
) Manual). The procedure for determining cover is given in Example 8.
8. In this instance, we have taken a value for h, such that slab thicknesses are assumed to vary in
steps of 10 mm. To use steps of 25 mm (approx. 1 inch) would be too conservative for slabs.
Hence 10 mm steps (corresponding to the metric standard) should be adopted.
I 9. The edge areas of the slab, i.e. the 1.22 m strips carrying the parapet loads, will be more
heavily reinforced than the rest of the slab. However, only the central part of the slab is
actually designed in this example.
!.
10. There may be other alternatives to increasing the mid-span steel, but this approach makes the
detailing for curtailment very simple and also helps to satisfy the deflection check, which is
very critical in slabs. This approach also facilitates the detailing of steel for support restraint,
as shown in the figure. One possible alternative is to use smaller diameter bars at closer
spacings, but bars smaller than 10 mm, if used as main steel, will not be very stiff and may
deflect significantly during concreting, thus losing their cover.
11. As shown in the figure, this is a very neat method of providing top steel at partially restrained
ends of slabs and beams.
12. It is better to put 0.25% of reinforcement as a lower limit in deflection calculations for Sri
Lankan practice, although the actual reinforcement may be less than that. In addition, a
maximum upper limit of 35 for span/effective depth should also be imposed on one way
I simply supported slabs, because Eq 7 .16 can give unreasonably high values.
i
13. According to Clause 9.3 .1.1 (2), transverse reinforcement to principal reinforcement is not
necessary at supports where there is no transverse bending moment. But it is advisable to
provide transverse reinforcement, because it will hold together the principal reinforcement,
preventing displacement during construction.
I
f. 14. It may be convenient to reinforce the entire slab with T10@170 mm at mid span and
T10@340 mm at support, since the central part of the slab already has T10@200 mm and
T10@400 mm at span and support respectively. The small penalty in cost will probably be
worth the simpler detailing arrangement.
I
l Concluding Notes
[. 15. It is important to keep in mind curtailment, bar spacing rules and minimum steel requirements
while designing the reinforcement, because these detailing considerations may lead to the
design being altered, as in the case here.
!
l
L
Example 15 - Two Way Slab
A two way spanning slab which has several panels in each direction has a panel size of 5 m x
6 m. The imposed load on the slab is 3 kN/m2 . The loading from finishes and light partitions can
each be taken as 1 kN/m 2. Design a typical interior panel, using fck = 20 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa,
and density of reinforced concrete= 25 kN/m3.
Introductory Notes
1. The short span length and loading for this example have been made identical to those in
Exan1ple 13 for a one-way spanning slab. Hence, results can be compared.
2. The comers of this interior panel are prevented from lifting because of continuity. Adequate
provision should be made for torsion at comers framed by simply supported edges that are
prevented from lifting (IStructE Manual, Clause 5.2.4.l(ii)).
Slab thickness
Note 3 Assume a span/effective depth ratio of 42 (for a

continuous tvvo way slab)
Table 4. I ,44N Take cover = 25 mm
4.4.4.1 (This is taken considering exposure class XC 1 and bond
IStructE requirements; 3 hours of fire resistance will result).
Manual and bar diameter as 10 mm, then we can choose h = 150 h = 150 mm
(Table 5.1) mm and dshort = 150 - 25 - 10/2 = 120 mm and d1ong dshort = 120mm
Note 4
= 120 - 10 = 110 mm d1ong = 110mm
Note 5
Loading (udl) I
l -
Selfload = (0.15)(25) = 3.75 kN/m
Finishes = (1.0) = 1.00 kN/m
Total dead load = 4.75 kN/m
Imposed load = (3) = 3.00 kN/m
Partitions = (1) = 1.00 kN/m
Total imposed load = 4.00 kN/m
Design load= (1.35)( 4.75) +(1.5)( 4.0) = 12.4 kN/m n = 12.4 kN/m
Bending moments
This interior panel has ly/lx = 6/5 = 1.2

Short way, edge =(0.042)(12.4)(5) 2= 13.02 kNm/m
Short way, span =(0.032)(12.4)(5) 2= 9.92 kNm/m
IStructE Long way2 edge =(0.032)(12.4)(5) 2= 9.92 kNm/m
Manual Long way, span =(0.024)(12.4)(5) 2= 7.44 kNm/m
(Table 5.3)

r
i
l
I
! . I.
' Reference Calculations
- .
. . ":..
Output . .-.
Design for bending (Short way, mid-span)
i
Appendix A.2 K' = 0.167
Eq A.5 Now, K = M/bd 2 f
I.
K=
ck
(9.92 x 10 6 ) !:
{(1000)(120) 2 (20)}
I .
) K = 0.034 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced

,.
Eq A.6 z = d [o.5 + j(o.25 - K/1 .134 )]
...... !
z = (120) [o.5 + j(o.25- 0034/ 1 .134 )]
r
~r;;
; ..
z = 116.3 mm$ (0.95)(120) = 114 mm
So take z = 114 mm
I Eq A.9 As= M/co.87fykz)

_ 9.92 x10 6 ;
- 0.87 x 460 x 114
j
= 217.4 mm 2
Hence use Tl0@360 mm (218 mm 2 /m)
II
9.2.1.1(1) Check for minimum reinforcement
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 f~tm btd but not less
{,
) ck
than 0.0013btd
0.26 f~tm btd = 149 mm 2 /m /
yk
1
0.0013btd = 156 mm 2 /m
lL Minimum reinforcement provided= 218 mm 2 /m;
hence OK
'
i
I
9.3 .1.1(3) Maximum spacing
Smax,slabs = 2h :5 250mm
2h = 2 x 150 = 300 mm > 250 mm
-
! So allowable maximum spacing= 250 mm
Hence design will be controlled by maxim.um spacing; T10@250 mm
thus use Tl 0@250. If 50% steel is curtailed, maximum
! Note 6
spacing will be violated, though not minimum steel.
(314 mmZ/m)
I
l.
actual span ( 1) 5000
41 7
effective-depth = d
L ;irt = 120 = '

Refe~ence Calculations . . Output .
As,req 218
7.4.2(2) p = bd = 1000 x 120 = 0.0018 ( < 0.0025)
Note 7 So take p as 0.0025
p' = 0
7.4.2(2) Po = fu x 10- 3
= 0.0045 > p;
so use Eq 7.16.a
Table 7.4N
K = 1.5
3
7.4.2(2) d1 = K [11+1.5yfckp+
,.-Po 3.Zyfck p - 1 ) /2]
,.-(Po
Eq 7.16.a
3
I [
d = 1 5 11
0.0045
+ l. 5'-120 0.0025
(0.0045
+ 3 ' 2'-120 0.0025 - 1
) /zl -,
I
- = 50
d
7.4.2(2)
310 500Asprov 500 x 318
Eq7.17 ' = = 1.59 <t:. 1.5
Note 8 Gs fykAs,req 460 X 218
Note 7
(~)all = 50 X1.5 = 75 > 45
( ~) -
d act -
41.7 < 45; hence OK
Deflection OK
Other reinforcement requirement for bending

It can be shown that the following reinforcement are ~.
required for other spans

Short way continuous edge T10@270 mm Short way edge
Long way continuous edge T10@330 mm T10@250 mm
Long way mid span T10@400 mm Long way edge
[but maximum spacing of250 mm governs in all cases] T10@250 mm
Short way edge
Check for shear T10@250 mm
Short way support
6m
IStructE
Manual 1 '
(Figure 5.2)
Note 9
A~llllllllllll~B
A B
Load Distribution on AB

r
II.
I
...
... ,.
I
I Reference C~Iculafiori~ . . _ Output .
So reaction (shear force) at the support AB
!
"
= n x (5/2) x 1 = 12.4 x 2.5 x 1 = 31 kN/m

'
I
I
without links at short way support
1
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [ CRct,ck(lOOp1fck) h + k1 O'cp] bwd
I Eq 6.2.a with a minimum of
I Eq 6.2.b VRd,c = (vmin + k10'cp)bwd
O'cp = Nect/ Ac = 0
~ = 1 + ~ = 2.29 $ 2.0
1.
k = 1 +
A5 1 314
6.2.2(1) PI = bwd = 120 X 1000 = 0.0026 ~ 0.02
0.18 0.18
CRd = - = - - = 0.12
,c yc 1.5
k1 = 0.15
Vmin -
- 0.035k 3/2fck liz
3 1
= 0.035 x 2 /2 x 20 /z
= 0.44 N/mm 2
bw = 1000 mm
( Vmin + k1 O'cp)bwd = 52.8 kN/m
vRct.c = [co.12)(2)(0.26 x 20/h + o] (1000)(120) x 10-3
= 49.9 kN/m < 52.8 kN/m;
hence use VRct c = 52.8 kN/m
6.2.1(4) VEct = 31 kN/m < 52.8 kN/m
so shear reinforcement is not required Shear OK
---!-------ir- ~~ ------:----
Cone Soc I
Detailing 1800 1800 :

[ I
)21T10@250T
(Figure 10) ) I
I
I
Note 10 1
--------f-+----~'--S21Tl0@2508
I
) -'
.....
6000
0
0
0
<n
8
t - - - - - - ------V) J
Jll ~ ------ ------
r -
f-
.,..,
0

0
f-

O'.l
. 0.,..,
0
f-
.,.., .,..,
[, N N
L Design of Slabs Page 6 7
I
3. A trial value for span/depth ratio of 42 is reasonable for a lightly loaded, continuous square
2-way slab; a ratio of 40 would be appropriate for heavily loaded slabs. This will of course
reduce with the ratio of long to short span, reaching the value for 1-way slabs when the latter
ratio becomes 2. The span/depth ratio is calculated with respect to the shorter span, as it is ., ..
this that controls deflection.
4. It should be noted that the slab thickness required for a two-way slab is less than that required
for a one-way slab of similar span and loading- compare the 170 mm required for the slab in
Example 13 with the 150 mm required here.
5. In arranging the reinforcement in the slab, the short way reinforcement should be placed
outermost, in order to have the greatest effective depth, since the shorter span controls
deflection and the bending moments and shear forces are greater in the short way direction.
6. Two way slabs are, in general, very lightly reinforced, so that curtailing is often not possible
because of the minimum steel requirement or the maximum spacing requirement, or both.
Note that the allowable maximum spacing after curtailment will be 400 mm(< 3h = 450 mm).
upper limit of 45 for span/effective depth should also be imposed in two way continuous
slabs, because Eq 7 .16 can give unreasonably high values.
8. Eq 7.17 is a multiplier on the allowable span/depth ratio in Eq 7.16. This multiplier should not
be taken as greater than 1.5 (Table NA.5 , Sri Lanka National Annexe).
9. Shear links are normally not used in normal one or two way spanning slabs, because the shear
resistance of concrete is normally higher than the applied shear force. Only the short way
direction need be checked for shear, as it is the more critical.
10. The curtailing rules are taken from "How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2:
Detailing (Figure 1O)", by the Concrete Centre (2006).
Concluding Notes
11. Where an edge or comer panel is concerned, in addition to the main and edge steel, the
requirements of torsional steel reinforcement have to be met at the top and bottom of the slab
according to IStructE Manual (Clause 5.2.4(1)); in many cases, the main and edge steel
provided would meet those requirements.

f
1 Example 16 - Flat Slab

A flat slab, which has several bays in each direction, has a panel size of 5 m x 6 m . The design
imposed load on the slab is 3 kN/m 2 . The loading from finishes and light partitions can each be
considered to be 1 kN/m 2. Design a typical interior panel, using fck = 20 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa
and density of reinforced concrete= 25 kN/m 3 . It may be assumed that the columns supporting
the slab are braced.
Introductory Notes
I I. This example too can be compared with Examples 13 and 15.
I 2. Given that the slab has several bays (assume 2:. 3 bays) in each direction, and the ratio of the
longer span to the shortest does not exceed 1.2, the maximum value of bending moments and
i ) shear forces may be obtained from Table 5.4 of the IStructE Manual (Clause 5.2.3.4).
3. It will be assumed that the slab is without drops, and the maximum value of effective diameter
will be employed for column heads.
I
. :-:,. ~' I .
. .. -!". - caJ~tiJati!>fis "-

Slab thickness
). Note 4 Max. value ofhc = (1/4)(5.0) = 1.25 m he= 1.25 m

Note 5 Assuming a trial span/depth of 32,
effective depth= (6000)/(32) = 187.5 mm
) Table 4.1 If we take cover= 25 mm (for internal exposure class
'
Table 4.4N XC 1) and bar diameter = 10 mm, we can choose
Note 6 h = 220 mm, d1ong = 220 - 25 - 10/2 = 190 mm, h = 220 mm
BS EN 1992-1-2 dshort = 190 - 10 = 180 mm, davg = 185 mm dy= 190 mm
(Table 5.9) h > 200 mm and a= 35; hence 2 hr fire resistance. dx = 180 mm
davg=185 mm
).
Note 7 Loading (for entire panel)
(Panel area= 30 m2)

) Self load = (0.22) (30)(25) = 165 kN
Finishes = (1.0)(30) = 30kN
l Total dead load
Imposed load = (3.0)(30)
Partitions = (1.0)(30)
= 195 kN(G1<)
= 90kN
= 30kN
Total imposed load = 120 kN (Q1<)
l.
Design load= (1.35)(195) + (1.5) (120) = 443.3 kN F = 443.3 kN
l Bending moments
Note 8 Long way:- r"
5.3 .2.2(1) Effective span 11ong = (6 - 1.25) + l0.22 '= 4.97 m
.......____,,
i

.\ I J.
. - I
\
Reference - :output
Span moment= (0.063) (443.3)( 4.97) = 138.8 kNm Mspan,long
IStructE
Manual Col. strip (2.5 m) = (0.55)(138.8) = 76.3 kNm = 138.8 kNrn
Mid. strip (2.5 m) = (0.45)(138.8) = 62.5 kNm
(Table 5.4)
Support moment= (0.063)( 443.3)( 4.97)= 138.8 kNm Msup,long
(Table 5.5)
Col. strip (2.5 m) = (0.75)(138.8) = 104.1 kNm = 138.8 kNm
(Figure 4.2)
Mid. strip (2.5 m) = (0.25)(138.8) = 34.7 kNm
Short way:-
5.3.2 .2(1) Effective span !short= (5 - 1.25) + 0.22 = 3.97 m
IStrnctE Span moment= (0.063)( 443.3)(3.97) = 110.9 kNm Mspan,sht
Manual Col. strip (2.5 m) = (0.55)(110.9) = 61 kNm = 110.9 kNm
(Table 5.4) Mid. strip (3.5 m) = (0.45)(110.9) = 49.9 kNm
(Table 5.5) Support moment =(0.063)( 443.3)(3.97) = 110.9 kNm Msup,sht
(Figure 4.2) Col. strip (2.5 m) = (0.75)(110.9) = 83.2 kNm = 110.9 kNm
Mid. strip (3.5 m) = (0.25)(110.9) = 27.7 kNm
Design of reinforcement
Long way, span:-
Column strip (2.5 m wide)

Eq A.5 Now, K = M/bdZf
ck
(76.3 x 10 6 ) /
K= I {(2500)(190) 2 (20)}
Eq A.6 z = d [o .5 + j(o.25- K/i. 134 )]
z = (190) [o.5 + j(o.25 - 0 042 / .

1 134 )]
z = 182.7 mm$ (0.95)(190) = 180.5 mm
So take z = 180.5
EqA.9 As = M/co.87fykz)
_ 76.3 x10 6 I
- 0.87 x 460 x 180.5
= 1056 mm 2
Note 9 Hence use 14T10@c.180 mm (1099 mm 2 /m)
9.2.1.1(1) Check for minimum reinforcement

f
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26
.
;tm brd but not less
ck
than o.ool3brd

r
)
I Reference
0.26 f;tm btd = 591 mm 2
Calculations Output
yk
). 0.0013brd = 618 mm 2
Table3.I [ fctm = 2.2 MPa J
Minimum reinforcement provided= 1099 mm 2;
hence OK
I
9.2.l.I(2) Check/or maximum reinforcement
J.
100A 5 / _ (100)(1099)/i
Ac - (2500) (190)
r = 0.23 < 4; hence OK

::.~:f
r . 9.2. I. I (3) Maximum spacing
i Smax slabs = 2h ~ 250 mm
2h = 2 x 190 = 380 mm > 250 mm Long way, span
I So allowable maximum spacing = 250 mm
hence OK
> 180 mm; (col. strip)
14T10@c.180
mm
Middle strip (2.5 m wide)
Eq A.5 K = M/bd2f
ck
l
(62.5 x 10
6
) I
{(2500)(190) 2(20)}
l K=

Eq A.6 z = d [o.5 + jco.25 - K/i. 134)]
z = (190) [ o.5 +j ( o._25 - o.o 35/ 1 .134 )] .

z = 183.9 mm$ (0.95)(190) = 180.5 mm
So take z = 180.5 mm
r Eq A.9 As = M/ (0.87fykz)
_ 62.5 x10 6 ; -
- 0.87 x 460 x 180.5
I = 865 mm 2
Long way, span
(mid. strip)
Note I 0
Hence use I 1T10 @c.225 mm (As.prov == 864 mm 2) 11 TlO@c.225
l Crack width check (bar spacing rules)
mm
i Table 7.IN
Note I I
For reinforced concrete in exposure class XCI the
allowable crack width is 0.3 mm. (SLNA)
. f. . -
Page 71
L Design of Slabs
Reference . Calculations
- - Output
For crack width, the quasi permanent combination of
actions is used.
So the stress in the steel is,

f _ fyk (Gk+ 0.3Qk)As,req
IStructE 5
- 1.15 (1.35Gk + l.5Qk)oAs,prov
Manual
(Table 5.6) f = 460 195 + (0.3 x 120)
s 1.15 (1.35 x 195 + 1.5 x 120) 1
(Table 3.4)
f5 = 208.5 N/mm 2
(Assuming conservatively that As,req = As,prov)
So maximum allowable clear spacing is around 240 mm,
Table 7.3N and maximum spacing between bar centers is 250 mm>
180 mm, 225 mm; hence OK
Note 12 = As,req = 865

= 0.0018 < 0.0025
p bd 2500 x 190
Note 13 Hence use p = 0.0025
7.4 .2(2) p' = 0
Po = ~ x 10- 3 = 0.0045 > p;
7.4 .2(2)
Table 7.4N so use Eq 7.16.a
K = 1.2
7.4.2(2) 3
Eq7.16 .a d1 = r Po + 3.2yffck
K [ 11 + l.5yffck-
. p
r (Po
- - 1)
p
/zl
3
I [ 0.0045 (0.0045 ) /2]
d = 1. 2 11 +l.S-!200.0025 + 3 2126 0.0025 - 1
1
- = 40
d
7.4.2(2)
_31_0 = 500As,prov = 500 X 864 = l.0 9 < 1. 5
fykAs,req 460 X 865
Note 13 (~)
d all
= 40 x 1.09 = 43.6 > 35
Deflection O.K
]) 6000 .
(- = - - = 31 .6 < 35; hence OK '
d act 190

f
I
J. . - ..
Reference Calculatfortsc
.. -
..
i -.
.
.. - Output
I Long way SUQQOrt:-
I Column striQ (2 .5 m wide) Long way, sup
It can be found that reinforcement required for the (col. strip)
column strip (2.5 111 wide) As,req = 1445 mm 2 ; use
19T10@c.130
19T10@c.130 mm (As,prov = 1492 111111 2 ) mm
Middle striQ (2 .5 m wide)

As,req = 480
9.2.1.1(1) A5 min = 618 mm 2
r. Maximum bar spacing for crack control is 300 mm
Table 7.3N
' when steel stress is at 160 N/mm 2 (see below).
r
::;
.. -;
. So provide 9T10@c.275 mm (As,prov = 706.5 mm 2 )
IStructE fyk (Gk+ 0.3Qk)As,req

fs = - -
1.15 (l.35Gk + l.5Qk)8As,prov
I Manual
(Table 5.6)
f =-
460 (195 + 0.3 x 120) x 480
s 1.15 (1.35 x 195 + 1.5 x 120) x 1 x 706.5
fs = 141.6 N/mm 2 < 160 N/mm 2 Long way, sup
Note 14 (mid. strip)
Hence allowable maximum spacing for crack control is
Table 7.3N 30 0 mm. So 9T10@c.275 mm would be acceptable. 9T10@c.275 mm
J
Short wav SQan:-

Column striQ - 2.5 m wide Short way, span
As above, it can be shown that reinforcement required is (col.strip)
.l 891 mm 2 and that 12T10@c.210 can be used

As,prov = 942 mm 2
12T10@c.210
mm
Note 15
[.. Middle striQ - 3.5 m wide
' As,req = 729 mm 2
9.2.1.1(1) As min= 820
) Table 7.3N Maximum bar spacing for crack control is 300 mm
when steel stress is at 160 N/mm 2 . So provide
12T10@c.290 mm.
I Table 7.3N
As.prov = 942 mm 2
We can show that f5 =161.3N/mm 2 , and hence
Short way, span
(mid. strip)
maximum spacing ~300 mm; hence OK
12T10@c.290
! Provide 12T10@c.290 mm (As,prov = 942 mm 2 ) mm
Short way SUQQOrt:- Short way, sup

Column striQ - 2.5 m wide (col. strip)
It can be shown that reinforcement required is 1216 16T10@c.155
mm2; use 16T10@c.155 mm (As,p~ov = 1256 mm 2 )
1 mm

Reference
Middle strip - 3 .5 m wide Short way, sup
It can be shown that reinforcement required is 405 mm 2 ; (mid. strip)
But use 12T10@c.290 mm for crack control 12T10@c.290
(As,prov = 942 mm 2 ) mm
Check for shear
Area of column head= (n/4)(1.25) 2 = 1.23 m

Perimeter of column head= n(l.25) = 3.93 m
VEct = F - 1.23 X n = 443.3 - ( 443.3/6 X 5) X 1.23
VEd = 425.1 kN
VEd ~ 425.1 x 10 -
3
2
u d - 3930 x 185 - 0 58 N/mm
0
~d 2
6.4.3(3) VEct = ~-d = 1.15 x 0.58 = 0.67 N/mm
Uo
Eq 6.38
Figure 6.21 N
(dx+dy) (180+190)
6.4.2(1) Note: deff = = = 185 mm
2 2
Eq 6.32
Crushing Strength of the diagonal strut (concrete)
6.2.3(3) CTcwUoZ V1fcct
Eq 6.9 Vct ------
R ,ma x - (cot 8 +tan 8)
V = 0.6 [ 1 -
- f ck ] = 0.552 = V1
6.2.2(6)
250
Eq 6.6N 2
fed = 0.567fck = 0.567 X 20 = 11.34 N/mm
z = 0.9d = (0.9)(185) = 166.5 mm
6.2.3(3) acw = 1 for non prestressed members.
8 = 45 (max. allowable)
6.2.3(2)
(1.0) (3930) (166.5) (0.5 5 2) (11.34)x10- 3
VRct,max = (cot 45 +tan 45)
= 2048 kN
VRct,max 2048 X 10 3 2
VRct,max = Uod = 3930 X 185 = 2.82 N/mm
6.4.3(2) VRct max > VEct; hence OK
The perimeter length for the first critical section for shear
= n(l.25 + 2deff)
= n{l.25 + (4x 0.185)} =rc(l.99)
= 6.25 m

I
!'.
1.
J
Area within the perimeter
= rr(l.99) 2 /4
r. = 3.11 m 2 l \
r
VEct = F- ~ x n = 443.3 - (443.3/6 x 5) x 3.11
VEd = 397.3 kN
VEd 397.3 x 10 3 - 2
I
I. 6.4.3(3) u 1 d = 6250 x 185 - 0 34 N/mm
Eq 6.38 VEd .
Figure 6.21 N VEct = ~ u d = 1.15 x 0.34 =___Q.39 !'J/mm 2
I. 0
<':~
6.4.4(1) without links
1
Eq 6.47 VRct,c = [CRct,ck(100pf{ck) h + kicrcp]bwd
with a minimum of -
VRct,c = Vmin + \<1 Gcp
Gcp = Nect/ Ac = 0
6.4.4(1)
)
1
[200 [200
k = 1 + ~d = 1 + ~185 = 2.04 $ 2.0
6.4.4(1)
b =column width+ (3xeffective depth)
= 1250 + (185 x 3) = 1805 mm
(< 2.5 m, so calculate p based on column strip; this is
)
conservative)
For Jong way supported column strip ,n
P1y = 1492 /z500 x 190 = o.0031 ~~ v>
!" Similarly for the short way support column strip , '
~-r'""
;---'--
1256 \~
.. I Pix = / 2500 X 180 = 0.00 28 I
/
l So P1 = ~P1xP1y = 0.0029 < 0.02
0.18 0.18
6.2.2(1) CRd = - - = - - = 0.12
) ,c Ye 1.5
1
Vmin = 0.035k /2fck / 2= 0. 44 N/mm 2
3
6.2.2(1)
1
J VRct,c = (0.12)(2)(0.29 X 20) h + 0
= 0.43 N/mm 2 < 0. 44 N/mm 2
l So take VRct,c as 0. 44 N/mm 2 > VEct; Punching shear
6.4.3(2) hence shear reinforcement against punching is not r/f not necessary
necessary.
.1 :

Reference .thit}fot .
1250 2500 1250 1250
0
U'l
N
r---r-
I I
------i--
I I
- ----i
I
~--t-
I
t--~
rl
.. -----~-
I I I
12T10@290B
I
0
0
I I 1500
U'l
m I 12T10@290T
I I I r'
I
I
I I I
I
~--+-
I I
0
U'l
,_,
N
I I
--
g
,_,
00
--~-
I t ----1
I
12T10@210B
r '
I
-+-- -+- ---i

16T10@155T
0
I
L __ l_ - -
U'l I
N
rl
I
co
__ L_
co
1 __J
I- I-
"'
N
N
,...
U'l 0
~
0
m
,_,
N
@.i @J @.i @J
0
rl ,_,
0 ;:: ,_;::
~ I- .,.
I-
er.
rl
"' rl rl
4. EC 2 does not give guidance regarding column head dimensions. It says that an equivalent
frame method can be used for analysis, as in BS 8110. So the provisions given in BS 8110 are
used to determine the dimension of column head. Clause 3.7.1.4 of the BS 8110 says that
he should not be taken greater than 1.25 m.
5. The trial span/effective depth ratio should be around 0.9 times that used for continuous
one-way slabs (See Example 13, Note 3); hence a value of around 3 2 is reasonable. The
deflection is governed by the longer span, unlike in two-way slabs; therefore the slab
thicknesses will be greater for flat slabs than for two-way slabs of similar gimensions and
loading.
6. Compare this much greater overall depth with that of the 150 mm obtained for the two way
slab in Example 15; of course, there is the considerable advantage here of not requiring
beams. The greater effective depth should be used for the long way span - i.e. the long way
reinforcement should be on the outside - because deflection is governed by the longer span
and the moments in the long way direction are greater than those in the short way direction;
this too is the opposite of two way slab action. The average value of effective depth is used for
punching shear checks.

r
I
7. It is more convenient to determine the loading on an entire panel for flat slabs, as opposed to
I' that on a strip of unit width.
8. The flat slab has to be analysed in two mutually perpendicular directions, with the total load
r being taken in each direction. This is because there are no peripheral beams around the slab,
.. the flat slab acting as both slab and beam. The entire column head can be assumed as a support
I width, thus considerably reducing the effective spans of the slab. The IStructE Manual (Table
5.4) suggests a reduction of 0.15Fhc from the support moments only, but it is the BS 8110
approach that is used here.
j
9. The reinforcement in a flat slab is generally specified in terms of the number of bars in a given
strip. As such, the spacing may not be in preferred dimensions.
I 10. The minimum reinforcement and maximum spacing checks will be more critical for the
middle strip than the column strip. However, they can be shown to be satisfied here.
r
~ ::
11. Although Eurocode 2 permits an allowable crack width of 0.4 mm for exposure class XCl,
the SLNA limit this value to 0.3 mm.
1. 12. The reinforcement required in the middle strip is used as the reinforcement percentage for
deflection calculations.
13 . It is better to put 0.25% of reinforcement as lower limit in deflection calculations for Sri
upper limit of 35 for span/effective depth should also be imposed in flat slabs, because Eq
7.16 can give unreasonably high values.
14. Curtailment, in this and other instances will not be carried out in this example. In most cases,
the minimum steel requirement will preclude such curtailment, although the maximum
spacing requirement can generally be satisfied.
15. Note that the effective depth in the short way direction is 180 mm (as opposed to 190 mm)
and that the width of the middle strip is 3.5 m (as opposed to 2.5 m).
[, ..
{. .
.
)
Concluding Notes
l
J
.-
16. Unlike in the two-way slab, where the middle strips carry most of the moment and are hence
more heavily reinforced, in the flat slab, it is the column strips that carry most of the moment
and are more heavily reinforced.
17. Edge and comer columns of flat slabs will have column strips considerably narrower than
1 those in interior panels (Figure 5.3 of IStructE Manual). Furthermore, the enhancement
factors for shear due to moment transfer will be greater at these columns (see Clause 6.4.4(6)).
I.
I
18. In this example, the loaded area is taken as the area of the column head; this assumption is
correct if the length of the outstand element of the column head is less than the height of that
element - if this is no1: the case, the detailed provisions given in Clause 6.4.2(8) will need to be
j followed. Also, in some cases column heads are not used, for convenience of construction. In
such cases, bending reinforcement will be greater and shear reinforcement may be required.

Example 17 - Ribbed Slab
A ribbed slab wruch has several continuous spans of 5 m is to carry an imposed load of 3 kN /m2
as a one-way spanning slab. Taking the load from light partitions and finishes as 1 kN/m 2 each,
the density of reinforced concrete as 25 kN/m3, fck = 20 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa, design a
typical interior panel. Note that one hour fire resistance is required.
Introductory Notes
1. This example can be compared directly with Example 13, where the only difference is that the
slab is solid.
2. Although this slab is continuous, because of the difficulty ofreinforcing the topping over the
supports, it will be treated as a series of simply supported slabs .
, .,
I '
Reference I I
I
Choice of form
Note 3 Assuming a trial span/effective depth ratio of 26,

Table 4.1 Assuming cover of 25 mm (internal exposme cl ass XCJ )
Table 4.4N and bar size of 20 mm , we can choose
h = 230 mm and d = 230 - 25 - 20/2 = 195 mm h = 230 mm
Min. rib width for 0.5 hr. fire resistance = 80 mm and d = 195 mm
BS EN 1992-1-2 min. axis distance (a)= 25 mm ( < 25+(20/2)= 35
(5.7 .5(1)) mm); min. asd= 25+10 = 35 mm.
(Table 5.5) If minimum rib width is taken as 125 mm, then asd would
be (125 - 20) / 2 = 52.5 mm> 35 mm; hence OK
I I
So take min. rib width as 125 mm~ widening to 250 mm;
and rib spacing of 500 mm is chosen. ' I .
IStructE (< 1.5 m; hence OK) i_J

Manual Also use truckness of topping= 50 mm; then rib height=
(5.2.6) 230 - 50 = 180 mm ! 'I
Note4 {< (4) (125) = 500 mm; hence OK}
-
J
Now, effective truckness = (230)~
~ = {(50)(500) + (1/2)(125+250)(180)} / (500)(230) 1
= 0.51 '
LJ
Note 5 te = (230)(0.51) = 117 mm te=117mm
A non combustible finish of 30 mm min should be placed
IStructE on the 50 mm topping to ensure 80 mm min thickness for 1
Manual hr fire resistance .
(Table 5.1)
v
250
250
500
~

f
r-
I . ~ : ~-
Reference - -__. _.Oll9Juf . ,. _

I Loading (for 0.5 m strip)
1-- Note 6
Selfload = (0.117)(25)(0.5) = 1.46 kN/m
Finishes = (1.0)(0.5) = 1.00 kN/m
/" Total dead load = 2.46 kN/m
Imposed load = (3.0) (0.5) = 1.50 kN/m
Partitions = (1.0) (0.5) = 0.50 kN/m
I Total dead load = 2.00 kN/m
Design load =(1.35)(2.46)+(1.5)(2.0)= 6.3 kN/m Design UDL

I.
6.3 kN/m
...
" :
\:
Design for bending
/' Assuming slab is simply supported,
moment in span= (6.3)(5) 2 /(8) = 19.7 kNm
Eq A.5
Now, K = M/bdZf
ck
(19.7 x 10 6 ) /
K= /{(500)(195) 2 (20)}

Eq A.6 z = d [o .5 + j(o.25 - K/1 _134 )]
J
z = (195) [ o.5 + j (0.25 - 0052/ 1 .134)]

l z = 186 mm> (0.95)(195) = 185 mm
So take z = 185
I
J
x = (195 - 185)/0.4 = 25 mm (<SO mm)
Hence neutral axis is in flange.
Eq A.9 As= M/co.B7fykz)
!: _ 19.7 x10 6 ;
J
-- - 0.87 x 460 x 185
= 266 mm 2
Hence use 1T20 (As.prov= 314mm 2 ) Main r/f
1 T'.20 per rib
_,I. 9.2.1.1 (1) Check for minimum reinforcement
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 f;;: btd but not less
than 0.0013btd
Note 7 22
0.26 fctm btd = 0.26 X " X 187.5 x 195 = 45.5 mm 2
fyk 460
0.0013btd = 0.0013 x -187.5x195 = 47.5 mm 2
/. Minimum reinforcement provided= 314 mm 2 ;
l hence OK

Reference Calcufatioils. Output
actual span (I) 5000

effective depth = d act = 195 = 25 6
''
As,req 266
7.4.2(2) p = bd = 500 x 195
= 0.0027 (> 0.0025)
Note 8 p' = 0
Po = ~ x 10- 3 = 0.0045 > p;
7.4.2(2) so use Eq 7.16.a
' ,
Table 7.4N K = 1.0
3
7.4.2(2) fck p
dI = K [11 + 1.5yIT""" Po + 3.2yIT""" p
fck (Po - /2]
1)
'.
Eq 7.16.a 3
I
ct= i.o
[
11
0.0045
+ 1 5-JZO 0.0027 + 3 2-JZO
(0.0045 1 )
0.0027 -
/zl
I
-d = 30
310 500As,prov 500 x 314
7.4.2(2)
Eq7.17
~ = fykAs,req = 460 X 266 = 1 "28 < l. 5
b 500
7.4.2(2) -=--<3
bw 187.5
Note 8
(~)all = 30 X 1.28 = 38.4 > 35
(~)act < 35; hence OK Deflection O.K
6.2.1 (8) Check for shear
Shear force at "d" from support

Note 9 = {(6.3)(5)/2}{1- (0.195)/(2.5)} = 14.5 kN
Note 10 VEct = (14.5 x10 3) / (187.5)(195) = 0.40 N/mm2

I
. I j
l.J
without links at short way support
1
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [cRd,ck(lOOp1fck) h + kiCJcp] bwd
Eq 6.2.a with a minimum of
Eq 6.2.b VRd,c = ( Vmin +kl CJcp)bwd

r
. .,
I.
1-.
D"cp = Nect/ Ac = 0
I. 6.2.2(1)
Note 10
k = 1 +
~ ~ = 1 _+ 195 = 2.01 $. 2.0
bw = 125 + {125 x (35/180)} = 149 mm

6.2.2(1) As, prov 314
6.2.3(1) PI=
bd = 149 x 195 = 0.0108 s; 0.02
0.18 0.18
CRdc = - - = - - = 0.12
' Ye 1.5
3 1
/z
" '.
I. Vmin = 0.035k fzfck
3
= 0.035 x 2 /z x 20 /2
1
:: ~: :~ = 0.44 N/mm 2
I ( Vmin + ki O"cp)bwd = 11.8 kN
vRct,c = [co.12)(2)(1.0B x 20)

1
h + o] (149)(195) x 10- 3
= 19.2 kN > 11.8 kN
1
Shear r/fnot
6.2.1(4) VEct = 14.5 kN < 19.2 kN; hence shear reinforcement is
required
I
I
not required
Top steel over support
9.3.1.2(2) This is to control cracking and should be 25% of mid span

steel.
Over support
As= (0.25)(266) = 66.5 mmZ
9.3.1.2(2) Use 1 TlO bar (As,prov = 78.5 mm 2 ), extending (0.2)1 1 TlO per rib
= (0.2) (5.00) = 1 m into span on each side from the face
of the support.
I
IStructE Transverse ribs
f:~: Manual 10 x overall depth = 10 x 230 = 2300 mm
(5.2.6) So provide transverse ribs at centres of 2500 mm, with
' dimensions similar to the longitudinal ribs.
1.
J Note 11 So actual clear spacing
= 2.50 - 0.25 = 2.25m < 2.30 m; hence OK -
l
.J
I
_,
3. This trial ratio is reasonable for simply supported one-way slabs - see Note 6 in Example 14.
[
- 4. The information regarding the topping in ribbed slab is not given in EC2. So the dimension
given in BS 8110 Table 3 .18 is used to determine the thickness of the topping.
L
5. It should be noted that the effective thickness of this slab (reflecting the volume of concrete
that will be used) is much lower than the one-way solid slab of similar span and loading in
Example 13.
6. It is convenient to calculate the loading for a strip of width equal to a repeating cross sectional
unit.
7. The average width of web below the flange is used for these minimum steel calculations.
upper limit of 3 5 for span/ effective depth should also be imposed in ribbed slabs, because Eq
7.16 can give unreasonably high values.
I '
9. Since support details are not given, the shear force is calculated at a distance 'd' from the I .
centre-line of support (and not from the face of the support - Clause 6.2.1 (8)). The approach
here is conservative.
10. The width of web at the level of the tension reinforcement is used for shear stress calculations
- this is both the smallest width of web in the tensile area (Clause 6.2.2(1)) and between
tension & compression flanges (Clause 6.2.3(1)).
11. Transverse ribs also must be provided at a clear spacing not exceeding 10 times the overall
depth of the slab according to Clause 5.2.6 of the IStructE Manual, so the individual ribs in the
slab need not be treated as discrete elements.
Concluding Notes
12. Fire resistance considerations will, to a large extent, govern the choice of form in ribbed slabs.
Such slabs have much less fire resistance than solid slabs.
l .J
13. The design of these slabs is essentially the same as the design of flanged beams. Generally the
neutral axis will lie within the flange.
14. It should be noted that Clause 3.6.6.2 of BS 8110 suggests a single layer mesh reinforcement
for the topping, although it does not demand it. It ni.ay be quite difficult to place such a mesh
in a 50 mm topping while maintaining the top and bottorp cover requirements. However, such
' J
a mesh will control shrinkage cracks.
15. These ribbed slabs probably have a lower material cost than solid slabs, but their construction
costs may be greater, because of the form work requirements.

i
I
t
CHAPTER6
I.
Design of Columns
Example 18 - Column Classification

A four storey building has columns on a grid of 5 m x 5 m, supporting beams of dimension
'
525 mm x 300 mm in one direction only and a one-way slab of 175 mm thickness. The roof
) also has a beam-slab arrangement identical to other floors. The colwnns are of dimension
300 mm x 300 mm and the soffit to soffit height of floors is 3.5 m; the height from the top of
I'', :
~";. (. :: ' the pad foundation (designed to resist moment) to the soffit of the first floor beams is 5.0 m. If the
frame is braced, classify typical internal colwnns for ground and first floor as short or slender.
Assume that the ultimate axial load on ground floor columns is 850 kN and that on first floor
,. columns is 700 kN. Concrete strength Cfck) is 25 MPa.
I
Introductory Notes
I. Columns are classified as unbraced or braced on the one hand (depending on whether or not
they take lateral loads) and as slender or short on the other (depending on whether or not they
should be designed to carry additional moments due to deflection).
2. The effective length of a column will depend on the degree of fixity at its ends.
Refereii~e Cal~ulations
._\
l- Height between end restraints,
(for ground floor columns)
lcz = S.O m, Icy= 5.0+(0.525-0.175) = 5.35 m
(for other floor columns)
lcz = 3.5 - 0.525 = 2.975 m
Icy = 3.5 - 0.175 = 3.325 m
le is the clear distance of the columns in a given direction.
(
IStructE The end conditions for the columns in the direction of
J.
,
'~ Manual
(5.5.2 .1)
beams are all condition 1. Hence,~= 0.75
In the other direction the end condition is 2, except at the
..' Note 3 footing where it is 1. Hence,
!. ,_ '
IStructE ~ = 0.80 (ground floor columns)
Ground floor:
Manual ~ = 0.85 (other columns)
(Table 5.14) ]0 z = (0.75)(5000) = 3750 mm (ground floor) l 0 z = 3750 mm
. ,"-,\--
--------- - - -~\(QJ-5)(2975) = 223.1 mm (first floor) l 0 y = 4280 mm
f '......: A.,,..- ~Y '2r~0.8_Q)(5350) = 4280 mm (ground floor) First floor:
l 0 z = 2231 mm
r~ - 5.8.3.1(1)
Eq 5.13N AJim
= 0<85) (3325) = 2826 mm (first floor)
= 20. AB. C/-{i1

l 0 y = 2826 mm
Design of Columns Page 83

Reference Caiciilations - Output
5.8.3.1(1) A= 1/(1 + 0.2er)

B = -J1 + 2w
C=l.7-rm
n = NEd/ (A cfcd)
rm= Moi/Mo2
Since er and w are not known ,we can assume
5.8.3.1(1) A= 0.7 and B =1.1
Note 4 C= 1.7
"-1im = 20 x 0.7 x 1.1x1.7 x/.jNEct/CAcfcct)
"-!im = 26.2/JNEct/CAcfcct)
For ground floor

Note 5 = 26. 2 / .J,_8-5O-x-1-03_ /_[(_3_0_0_x_3_0_0_)(-0-
AJim,g .5-6-7_x_2_5_)]
= 32.1
For first floor
A.1imJ = 26.2/.j700 x 10 3 /[(300 x 300)(0.567 x 25)]
= 35.4
5.8.3.2(1) A.= 10 /i
Eq 5.14 lco1 = 300 X 300 3/ 12 = 675 x 10 6 mm 4 i
Aco1 = 300 X 300 = 90 X 10 3 mm 2 1.

.
I =
~col
A =
675
90
X
6
10
103 = 86.6 mm
col "\ X
Thus, for ground floor columns,

10 z/i = 3750/86.6 = 43.3 > 32.1 Ground floor
l 0 y/i = 4280/86.6 = 49.4 > 32.1; hence slender. columns are
slender.
Thus, for first floor columns,
l 0 z/i = 2231/86.6 = 25.8 < 35.4 First floor colmlli1s
I 0 y/i = 2826/86.6 = 32.6 < 35.4; hence non slender. are non slender.
l
.~
3. Here the value of p is taken from the simple guidelines given in Tables 5 .14 of the IStructE \.
Manual. But p could also be calculated from Equation 5.15 and 5.16 of the Eurocode 2. For
braced column the effective height is given as follows,
k1 )( kz )
lo = 0.51. (1 + 0.4~ + k1 1 + 0.45 + kz
Where k 1 and k2 are the relative flexibilities at the ends of the column.
Design of columns Page 84

r
According to the Concrete Centre' s publication, "How to design concrete structures using
Eurocode 2: Colwnns (2006)" the k value can be calculated as follows (provided adjacent
columns do not vary by more than 15% of the higher stiffuess),
Column Stiffness Eic/L 2Eib
k= =- ->01
L Beam stiffness (M/8) le lb -
According to Clause 5.8.3.2(5), in the definition of effective lengths, the stiffnesses of
restraining members should include effect of cracking, hence the stiffness of the connecting
4 1
beams (defined as M/8) is taken as ZEib and not E b. The ratio k has to be obtained for beams
lb lb
in one plane at a time.
4. It should be noted that, for most braced columns in framed structures, M01 will have the
opposite sign to M02 (i.e. double curvature bending), resulting in a C value of more than
I
I 1.7; hence if moments at ends are not known C is taken as 1.7, i.e. the minimum for
'
braced columns. Sometimes C could be lower than 1.7 too, so great care should be taken
'=1 (' in determining C. For unbraced structures C should be always taken as 0. 7.
I
I
5. It should be noted that the slenderness limits are a function of the loading too, and not
merely the geometry, as in BS8 l l 0.
Concluding Notes
6. Where edge colwnns are concerned, they will not have beams 'on either side' as specified in
the provisions of the IStructE Manual. In this case, the values in the Table 5. 14 of the
!StructE Manual may not be conservative and it is better to find the effective length based on
Clause 5.8.3 .2(3).
7. For a column to be considered non slender, both l 0 z/i and l 0 y/i have to be less than A.1im
8. When the colmnn is short, that is if A. is lower than A.iim' then the second order effects may
be ignored. Second order effects could be also ignored when they are less than 10% of the
first order effects, according to Clause 5.8 .2(6). Clause 5.8.8.3 gives an alternative to this by
considering stiffnesses of bracing elements such as shear walls.
l
l
l
L Design of columns Page 85
Example 19 - Symmetrically Loaded Short Column
A three storey building has colwnns on a grid of 5.0 m x 5.0 m, supporting beams of dimension
525 mm x 300 mm in one direction only and a one-way slab of 175 mm thickness. The roof
also has a beam-slab arrangement identical to other floors. The columns are of dimension
300 mm x 400 mm and the soffit to soffit height of floors is 3.5 m; the height from the top of
the pad foundation (designed to resist moment) to the soffit of the first floor beams is 4.0 m.
Assuming that the density ofreinforced concrete is 25 kN/m 3, fck = 25 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa,
the imposed loads on the roof and the floors 1.0 kN/m 2 and 2.5 kN/m 2 respectively and
allowance for partitions and finishes 1.0 kN /m2 each, design the ground floor part of an internal
column of the framed structure.
Introductory Notes
1. The major part of this exercise consists of a load evaluation, taking into account the appropriate
reduction factors for imposed loads specified in "BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Action on structures
- Part 1-1 : General actions - Densities, self weight, imposed loads for buildings". The partition
loads are taken as imposed loads, since their positions are not fixed.
- _.:. :. :~1:~~'--: . .:- ~:. -~.-!:!~~-:::.: ~-"-~:~~'.- ~~~ :: -J :--i::J:-: -:;( -.-."". :;-.- ~
:,.. :
.-_ . "",
-::~ -:::.._''...:- -- i C w'
~" ,c,. .-.
~~ - ', ';:"
~
~ '.: ;Output
Height between end restraints,
(for ground floor columns)
Icy = 4_.0 m, lcz = 4.0 + (0.525 - 0.175) = 4.35 m
le is the clear distance of the columns in a given direction.
IStructE The end conditions for the colwnns in the direction of

Manual beams are all condition 1. Hence~= 0.75
(5 .5.2.1) In the other direction the end condition is 2, except at the ' ... ,
footing where it is 1. Hence,
~ = 0.80 (ground floor colwnns)
IStructE l 0 y = (0.75)( 4000) = 3000 mm (ground floor)

Manual 10 z = (0.80) ( 4350) = 3480 mm (ground floor)
Table 5.14
J
5.8.3.1(1) "-1im = 20. A. B. C/-/D -
Eq 5.13N A= 1/(1 + 0.2er)

5.8.3.1(1) B = .J1 + 2w
C=l.7-rm
n = NEct/CAcfcct)
rm= Mo1/Mo2
5.8.3 .1(1) er and w are not known , so we can assume
A= 0.7 and B = 1.1
C = 1.7 (min. for braced columns)
"-iim = 20. x 0.7 x 1.1x1.7 x/)NEct/CAcfcct)
"-!im = 26.2/,/NEct/CAcfcct)

I
I.
.-
,. . I Reference Calculation~ - : . ,.: ;

Output
Colwnn grid dimensions are 5.0 x 5.0 m.

Hence, area corresponding to colwnn = (5)2 = 25 m2
Dead loads
Dead load from
3 slabs = (3)(25)(0.175)(25) = 328 kN
Beams = (3)(0.525-0.175)(0.3)(25)(5) = 39.4 kN
Columns=
{(2) (2. 97 5)+4.0}(0.3) (0.4) (25) = 29.9 kN
:
Finishes = (3)(1.0)(25) = 75kN
Total dead load = 472.3 kN Dead load
.;:.
I
I = 472.3 kN
:.,
Imposed loads
r From roof
From 2 floors
= (1.0) (25)
= (2)(2.5)(25)
From partitions = (2)(1.0)(25)
= 25 kN
= 125 kN
= 50kN
j. Total imposed load = 200 kN Imposed load
= 200 kN
Note 2
.. f / .
EN1990 . l!Jo=0. 7 i'r /~"" 1 , ...~~-,.
(Table A 1.1) I '1 1
f" EN1991-1-1 5 A0
lI (6.3 .1.1(10)) a.A = 7 lJ; o +A :::; 1.0
I 5 10
(6.3.1.2(11)) Ct.A = 7 X 0.7 + (5 X 5)
,) I
t = 0.9:::; 1.0
;::: 0.6; hence OK
l
/
'
~
,
'
l
2 + (n - 2)ljJ 0
1<
,J
) (6.3.1.2(11)) l.
n :I
n=3 '
/
-
\, 2 + (3 - 2) x 0.7 ( . \, r-
l -\ ,('
'
} . Ct.n = 3 = 0 .9 . 1 -1 ..
/
}. Hence, imposed load on column =( 0. 9 x Oj._x 200

= '----
162 kN
N = (1.35)(472) + (1.5)(162) = 880 kN
--
l For ground floor
5.8.3.2(1) A]im,g = 2 6.2I .J,--8-80_X_1_03_/_[(-3o-o-x-40_0_)(-0-.5-6-7-x-2-5)-] A.1im,g = 36.45
r: = 36.43
\ A.= 10 /i
I. about z axis
6 4
lea! = 300 X 400 3 /12 = 1600 X 10 mm
3
Arni = 300 x 400 = 120 x 10 mm
2
i'
. .'

~ ~ f

. ' .
. - (I:" - 1600 x 10 6 -
lz - ~~ - \ 120 x 103 - 115.5 mm
Similarly iy = 86.6 mm
Hence, for ground floor columns,

l0 y/iy = 3000/86.6 = 34.60 < 36.45
l02 /i 2 = 3480/115.5 = 30.13 < 35.45;
hence column is non slender.
Note 3 Design of reinforcement
Main reinforcement
IStructE
N 880 x 10 3
Manual 0 293
(Appendix C) bhfck = 300 X 400 X 25 =
Note4 Asfyk
0
bhfck <
9.5 .2(2) But As.min = f
0.lNEct
or 0.004Ac

yd
0.lNEd 0.1X880x10 3
---= = 220 mm 2
(SLNA)
fyd (460/1.15)
0.004Ac = 0.004 X (300 x 400) = 480 mm 2

Hence As,min = 480 mm 2 4T12
Note 4 Use 4T12 (As= 452 mm 2 ; though slightly< As.min) (Ase = 452 mm 2 )
Design of Links
9.5.3(1) Bar diameter= 6mm ~ max{6 mm; (12/4) = 3 mm}
9.5.3(3) Bar spacing = 240mm ~ min{20min = 20 x 12 = Links
240 mm; min{h; b} = 300 mm; 400 mm} T6@240 mm
Note 5 So use T6@240 mm
2. The total imposed load can be reduced on the basis of the number of floors supported by the
column based on Clause 6.3 .1.2(11) of ES 1991-1-1 :2002; this is because all the floors in the
building would not be at the design load simultaneously. A similar reduction factor is given in
Clause 6.3 .1.2(10) for imposed load based on the floor area as well. The combined reduction
factor for imposed load should not be less than 0.6 (Clause 6.3 .1.2(10) of EN 1991-1-1).
3. Since the column is non slender and the arrangement of the loads are synunetrical, the design
could be carried out using the design axial load and the moment occurring from minimum
eccentricity that is given in Clause 6.1 (4). So the required reinforcement could be obtained
from the Appendix C of the IStructE Manual. It is the point where the ~f value cuts the Nh
bh ck 20

1
f line. But if h < 400, then the point would be where the _N_ y-axis value and z~N x-axis
bhfck bh fck
r . 1
value (in N and mm units) coincide. This method of design is applicable for short braced
columns, where moments are negligible due to a symmetrical arrangement of loads.
4. Negative values may be obtained for Ase; this indicates that nominal steel will be sufficient. In
any case, bar diameters under 12 mm are generally not used for columns, because they will
not be stiff enough for the erection of the reinforcement cage. Also according to Clause
9.5.2(1) of Sri Lankan National Annex (SLNA), min to be used in Sri Lanka is 12 mm for
columns. The SLNA also specifies in Clause 9.5.2(2) that the minimum reinforcement should
!
I
be 0.004Ac, double the EC2 recommended value.
5. Clause 9.5.3(4) specifies that the 20 min maximum link spacing be reduced by a factor of
). 0.6 above and below beam-column joints within distances equal to the larger colwnn
. ~
dimension; and at laps where main bar diameters exceed 14 mm. Note that mild steel of fy =
2
r
:'.~
250 N/mm can also be used for links.
Concluding Notes
i
6. In BS8110, it was possible to use one of two equations to design the reinforcement for
l columns depending on whether they were loaded symmetrically or approximately

symmetrically. There are no corresponding equations in EC2.
7. The column orientation in this example is such that the major axis is used to resist the greater
! column effective length. Hence, the 400 mm cross sectional dimension is perpendicular to the
beam axis direction.
!
( 8. Masonry walls have not been included in the load evaluation, because they would generally
be on the periphery (or in the core area) of a building. This example is about an interior
I column, which in most open plan office buildings would only have lightweight partitions in
its tributary area.
r
}.
~
)
~-
!
l.
f:
Example 20 - Short Column with Axial Load and Moment
A short colwnn of 300 mm x 400 mm cross section carries an ultimate axial load of 800 kN. If
an ultimate moment of 80 kNm is applied ,_; :
(a) about the major axis,
(b) about the minor axis,
(c) about both axes
Determine the colwnn reinforcement required. Note that fck = 25 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
Introd uctory Notes
1. This column carries a substantial moment as well as an axial load . Hence, we can use the
design charts, which will give us a symmetrically reinforced section .
. - - ,_ : -'" ~
Reference .:~:-
_c~kufatlon.s -
.-:~-:-.,::i_'I:' ,_.: ,._ ..-'"_fj; ' . - -
_q utput
N = 800 kN, M = 80 kNm
N (800 x10 3 ) '. \'
267
bhfck = ( 400)(300)(25) = 0. \ -r. -,. -,_L-- ,
.' ~
'I
(for all cases) _,,. -- I ~ , -
\
\
.... . 'I_
(a) Major axis bending

b = 300 mm, h = 400 mm
M (80 x10 6 )
IStructE
Manual bh 2 fck = (300)( 400) 2 (25) = O.O?
(Appendi x C) Asfyk - d -
Note 2 bhfck - 0.0 ( /h - 0.85)
0.lNEd
9.5 .2(2)
(SLNA)
But As.min = f
yd
or 0.004Ac
0.lNEct 0.1 X 800 X 10 3
= = 200 mm 2
fyd (460/1.15)
0.004Ac = 0.004 X (300 X 400) = 480 mm 2 ; .
Hence As.min = 480 mm 2

Major axis
Note 3 Use 4T12 (As= 452 mm 2; though slightly< As.min)
4T12
(b) Minor axis bending
-'
b = 400 mm, h = 300 mm
M (80 x10 6 )
IStructE 9
bh 2 fck = (400)(300) 2 (25) = 0.0
Manual
(Appendix C) Asfyk - d -
bhf - 0 .10 ( /h - 0.80)
ck
2
As,req = 652 mm
Provide 4T16 bars (As.prov = 804 mm 2 ).
0.lNEct 0.1 X 800 X 10 3 _ 2

9.5.2(2) fvct = (460/1.15) - 200 mm

r
I
i
Reference
0.004Ac = 0.004 x (300 x 400) = 480 mm 2
As,min = 480 mm 2
So As,prov = 804 mm 2 > As,min; hence OK
(.
I
/
(c) Biaxial bending

IStructE hMzi 400 x 80 Minor axis
Manual 33
bMyi = 300 x 80 = 1. 4T16
(Table 5 .17)
hM
(Fig. 5.19) 0.2 <--Zl < 5
Note 4 bMyi
h' = 400 - 35 - 12.5 - 8 = 344.5 mm
b' = 300 - 35 - 12.5 - 8 = 244.5 mm
Mzih' 80 x 344.5
-- = = 1.4>1
Myib' 80 x 244.5
So design moment about y axis is taken as zero and about
z axis (h = 300 mm, b = 400 mm) is given as follows,
r. IStructE
Manual ~b'M
(Table 5.18)
M~i = Mz + h' y
BS 8110-1 ~ = 0.73
(3.8.4.5) 0.73 x 244.5 x 80
M~i = 80 + = 121.4 kMm
3 44. 5
!StructE M (121.4 x10 6 )

Manual bh 2 fck = (400)(300) 2 (25) = O.l3S
(Appendix C)
I Asfyk _ dj _
bhfck - 0.28 ( h - 0.80)
}
Note 5
As,req = 1826 mm 2
J Provide 4T25 bars (As,prov = 1964mm 2 ). Biaxial
.'
4T25
J .: Design of links
9.5 .3(3)
For major axis bending, use T6@240 mm
Bar diameter= 6mm;:::: max {6 mm; (16/4) = 4 mm}
l Bar spacing = 240mm :S min{20min = 20 X 12 =
240mm; min{h; b} = 300mm; 400mm}
Major axis -
T6@240 mm
r 9.5.3(3) For minor axis bending, use T6@300 mm
_,
Bar diameter= 6mm;:::: max{6 mm; (20/4) = 5 mm}
L Bar spacing = 300mm :S min{20min = 20 X 16 =

320mm; min{h; b} = 300mm; 400mrn}
Minor axis -
T6@300 mm
9.5.3(3)
For biaxial bending, use T8@300 mm
1 Note 6
Bar diameter = 8mm ;:;:: max{S mm; (25/4) = 6.25 mm}
Bar spacirig = 300mm :S min{20min = 20 X 25 = Biaxial -
- 500rnm; min{h; b} = 300mm; 400mm} T8@300 mm
!-"
L
Reference Calculations Oti'tpuL .
9.5.3(4) Within a distance equal to 400 mm above and below
Note 7 beam or slab, the maximum transverse spacing of links
should be limited to 0.6 times the above values.
2. If we assume a cover of around 35 mm (XC3 conditions), links of 8 mm and a bar diameter of

25 mm then d/h will be ( 400 - 55.5) / ( 400) = 0.86 for major axis bending and
-' -C~
(300 - 55.5)/(300) = 0.82 for minor axis bending. So for bending about the major axis
~we use the d/h = 0.85 chart and for bending about the minor axis the d/h = 0.80 chart.
I,
These are given in Appendix C of the IStructE Manual. If there is a doubt, the lower d/h value
should be used, as this is more conservative. The above axial distance (i.e. 55.5 mm)
combined with the minimum column dimension of 300 mm will give a 1 hour fire resistance,
as per Table 5.2a of BS EN 1992-1-2 (similar to Table 5.15 in the IStructE Manual). These
-.. tables can only be used for braced columns and if (i) for intermediate floors the actual length
of the column (centre to centre) :S 6m; (ii) for the upper floor the actual length of the column
(centre to centre) :S 4.5m; (iii) the first order eccentricity under fire conditions :S O. l 5h (or
b) ; and (iv) the amount of reinforcement< 0.04 Ac. Otherwise the more stringent Table 5.2b
of BS EN 1992-1-2 must be used .
3. According to Clause 9.5.2(1) (Sri Lankan National Annex), the minimum di ameter of the
column reinforcement should be 12 mm.
4. In this Table 5.17 and Figure 5.19 of the IStructE Manual, they axis is treated as the major
axis (with 'h' being the dimension in the plane of bending) and the z axis as the minor axis
(with 'b' being the dimension in the plane of bending). It is best that Clause 3.8.4.5 of BS
8110: Part 1 be consulted as well.
5. If the steel requirement for bi-axial bending is greater than that which can be provided as
comer steel, the additional amount required has to be provided in each of the two mutually I
I '
perpendicular directions, distributed along the faces of the section.
6. The maximum spacing allowed in Clause 9.5.3 should be reduced through a factor 0.6, in
sections within a distance equal to the larger dimension of the column cross-section above or
below a beam or a slab, and also near lapped joints when the maximum diameter of the
longitudinal bar is greater than 14 mm ; a minimum of 3 bars evenly placed in the lap length is
I '
required too. )
7. Where bars other than comer bars are used, multiple links may have to be used if (the
intermediate bar is greater than 150 mm away from a restrained bar (Clause 9.5 .3(6)).
Concluding Notes
8. In general, shear and crack control are not very critical for columns.

r
" 't
) ~I {, I
--
I'_, . ,
r-,
, )I ('
I Example 21 - Slender Column L. -
/ _
A braced slender column of 300 mm x 400 mm cross section carries an ultimate axial load of
I
800 kN at ground floor level. -It is bent in double curvature about the major axis, carrying
) ultimate moments of 80 kNm and 40 kNm at its ends. Beams of 300 mm x 500 mm are
connected to the four faces of the column. The lengths of the columns and beams are 9 m and 6 m
respectively. Determine the column reinforcernent if fck = 25 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
) ; -"-~.,
I -
_, ~
Introductory Notes
J 1. This example can be compared with Example 20, where the non slender column was of the
.--
I_ same dimensions and carried similar loads.

L {<
: Reference Calculation_s Output
:-r
r: Type of column
About Major Maxis
I Ico1 = 300 X 400 3 /12 = 1600 x 10 6 mm 4
/' 3
!beam = 300 X 500 /12 = 3125 X 10 mm
6 4
Aco1 = 300 X 400 = 120 x 10 mm

3 2
i = {J:" = 1600 x 106 = 115.5 mm

y ~~ "\ 120 x 10 3 J
iy = 115.5 mm
Note: iz = 86.6 mm (about Minor (z) axis)

iz = 86.6 mm
k = Column stiffness = Elc/'\"' 2Elb

2
O.l
Note 2 2: Beam stiffness (M/8) Le L Lb ,_\
(EI/L)col,
kistnr = (2 EI/L)b 1 + (2 EI/L)bz
/
,I
(1600 x 10 6/9000) I
I
-~~~~--,-~~--,--~--,--~~~--::--:--::-:--:-7 I
- 2(3125 x 10 6/6000) + 2(3125 x 10 6/6000) ---..;._\
\
(. = 0.085 < 0.1; hence use 0.1 // 1\
k 1stnr = 0.1 'J >--
kfdn = 0.1
Note 3 kfdn = 0.1
Column is braced, so
I,,= 05\ (1+04:~ kJ (1+0.4:: k,)

1
, I. 5.8.3.2(3)
Eq 5.15
0.1 ) ( 0.1 )
=
05
x 9 x "\ ( 1 + 0.45 + 0.1 1 + 0.45 + 0.1 loz= 5.32 m
5.8.3.2(1) = 5.32 m
Eq 5.14 lo
"A=- .
i
I..
L Design of Columns Page 93
Aact,y = 46.1
1
Aact,y - lozj j -- 5320/115.5 -- 46 1' Aact,z
- 1
-- 61 4
Aact,z = 61.4
A.lim = 20. AB. C/-Jil
5.8.3.1(1) A= 1/(1+0.2cpeff)
Eq 5.13N A is taken as 0.7
5.8.3.1(1)
Note 4 B = .../1+2w
B is taken as 1.1
5.8.3.1(1) C=l.7-rm
rm= M01 /M 02 where IM 02 I 2:: IM 01 I
So rm = (-40)/80 = (-0.5)
c = 1.7- (-0.5) = 2.2
n = NEd/(Acfcd)
A.1im,y = 20 x 0.7 x 1.1 x 2.2 x/.JNEct/CAcfcct)
5.8.3.1(1)
A.1im,y = 33.88/.JNEct/CAcfcd)
A.iim,y = 33 .88/ J,_..8-00_x_l_03_/_(_30_0_x_4_00-)-(o-.-56_7_x_25-)
1
AJim,y = 49 4 /...1im,y = 49.4
Aact,y < AJim,y; hence the column is short.
For the minor axis;

Since there is no initial moment, C = 1.7
Hence AJim,z = 26.18/.JNEct/CAcfcd) = 38.2 A!im,z = 38.2
Aact,z > A.1im,z; hence the column is slender.

J
Design moment about v axis

5.8.8.2(2) Moe = 0.6Mo2 + 0.4Mo 1 2:: 0.4Mo2
Eq 5.32 Moe= 0.6 X 80 + 0.4 X (-40) = 32 kNm
0.4M 02 = 0.4 x 80 = 32 kNm
So Moe = 32 kNm Moe= 32 kNm
.__/
Moment due to geometric imperfection (both axes)

Mgi = NEctei . 1
Silo
e 1 =2-
Si =So. ah. am
Eq. 5.1
ah = 2/..Ji = 2/-19 = 0.67

5.2(5) am = .Jo.5(1+1/m) = -J~0.-5(_1_+_1_/1-) = 1
( Since m is not known, it could be safely taken as 1)
S 0 = 1;200

r
r
[. J. Reference Calculations Output
. 3
ei = c1;200) x o.67 x 1 = 3.35 x 10-
I ). . 3.35 x 10- 3 x 5320
5.2(7) ei = = 8.91 mm
2
Eq 5.2 Mgi = 800 x 8.91 x 10- 3 = 7.1 kNm
j Mgi = 8.3 kNm
f
First order bending moments:
Note 5
MoEct,y= 32 + 7.1 = 39.1 kNm
I
! MoEct,z= 7.1 kNm
MoEct,y= 39.lkNm
MoEct.z= 7.lkNm
Second order bending moment - about z axis
l. 12
e 2 = (1/r)~
c
:' ; ):. Eq 5.34 1/r = Kr. K. 1/r 0
5.8.8.3(1)
1/r 0 = yct/ (0.45d)
Eyct = fyct/E 5 = 0.87 X 460/200 X 10 3 = 0.002
l Note 6
5.8 .8.2(4)
1/r 0 = 0.002/(0.45 x 244.5) = 18.2 x 10- 6
c = 8 (although 10 is normally used).
Note 7
) .. 5.8.8.3(4) Kqi = 1 + ~crer ;:::: 1
Eq 5.37 ~ = 0.35 + fck/200 - 7'./150
!. 5.8 .8.3(4) ~ = 0 .35 + 25/200 - 61.4/150
( = 0.066
Kqi = 1 + 0.066 x 2 = 1.132
Kr is initially assumed as 1.0
]2
5.8.8.2(3) M2 = NEcte 2 = 800 x (1/r) ~
c
]2
M2z = NEcte 2z = 800 Kr . Kcjl. 1/r 0 . ~
X
c
5320 2
= 800 x 1 x 1.132 x 18.2 x 8 x 10- 9
= 58.3 kNm
Second order bending moment M2z = 58.3 kNm M2z = 58.3 kNm
0.lMoEct,z = 0.1 x 7.1 = 0.71 kNm
M2z = 58.3 kNm > 0.lMoEct,z
Hence the second order bending moments have to be
t~"'
considered. .- , c "' : ,_ ; ~ '"'
,_......,, . :- " ' 1_'
Note 8 MEct ' z=. 7.1 + 58.3 = 65.4 kNm

MEct,y= 3,9.1, ___ kNm
h' = 400 - 35 - 12.S - 8 = 344.5 mm

r IStructE
Manual
b' = 300 - 35 - 12.5 - 8 == 244.5 mm
Mzh' 65.4 x 344.5
- -- = = 2.35 > 1
:t (Table 5.18)
Myb' 39.1 x 244.5

L
Reference
So design moment about y axis is taken as zero and about
z axis (h = 300 mm, b = 400 mm) is given as follows,
BS 8110-1 ~b'M
(3.8.4.5)
M' = M
z zh'
+ y
IStructE N (800 x 10 3 )
Manual 0 267
bhfck = (400)(300)(25) =
(Table 5 .18) ~ = 0.73
0.73 x 244.5 x 39.1
5.8.8.2(1) M~ = 58.3 + 7.1 + .
344 5
Eq 5.31 = 58.3 + 27.4 = 85.7 kNm
Note 9 M'z = 85.7 kNm
M (85.7 x 10 6 )
95
bh 2 fck = (400)(300) 2 (25) = 0.0
Asfyk - d -
bhf - 0.12 ( /h - 0.80)
ck
IStructE A 5 = 783 mm 2
n -n
Manual Kr= u ::::; 1
(Appendix C) nu - nbal
NEd 800 x 10 3
n = (Acfca) = (300 X 400)(0.567 X 25) = 0 47
= 0.40
nbal
A fya5 783 x (0.87 x 460)
w =-- = = 0.18
5.8.8.3(3) Acfcd (300 X 400)(0.567 X 25)
Eq 5.36 nu = 1 + w = 1 + 0.18 = 1.18
1.18 - 0.47
Kr = 1.1 - O.4 O = 0.91
8
M 2z = 0.91 X 58.3 = 53.1 kNm
M' z = 53.1 + 27.4 = 80.5 kNm I
M' z = 80.5 kNm L~
M (80.5 x 10 6 )
89
bh 2 fck = ( 400)(300) 2 (25) = 0.0
Asfyk - d - -
bhfck - 0.11 ( /h - 0.80 f I
2 I I
As,req = 717 mm _)
NEd 800 x 10 3
IStructE n = (Acfcct) = (300
. X 400)(0.567 X 25)
= 047
Manual
(Appendix C) nbal = 0.4
A5 fyct 717 x (0.87 x 460)
w =--= = 0.17
Acfcct (300 x 400)(0.567 x 25)
nu= 1+w=1+0.17 = 1.17
1.17 - 0.47
Kr = 1.17 - 0.40 = 0.91
Note 10 Hence the. same Kr value is repeated. So the iteration is
stopped.

Reference . ... __>.CaJ.~~ap~oqs ,., ... Qutput _
2
As,req = 717 mm
Provide 4T16 bars (As.prov = 804 mm 2 )
9.5.2(2) Check As,min =

0.lNEd
f or 0.004Ac

(SLNA) yd
0.lNEct 0.1 X 800 X 10 3 _ 2
J. fyct = ( 460 /1.15)
0.004Ac = 0.004 x (300 x 400)
-
200
mm

= 480 mm 2 > 200mm 2 4Tl6
I < 804 mm 2 ; hence OK
Design of Links
9.5.3(3) For major axis bending, use T6@300 mm
Bar diameter= 6mm;::: max{6 mm; (16/4) = 4 mm}
Bar spacing = 300mm ~ min{20min = 20 x 16 =
320mm; min{h; b} = 300mm; 400 mm}
9.5.3(4)
Note 11 Within the distance equal to 400 mm above and below
the beam, the maximum transverse spacing of links Shear links
should be limited to 0.6 x 300 = 180 mm . T6@300 mm
l
I
2. According to Clause 5.8.3.2(4), the stiffness of the restraining members should include the
effect of cracking. So the stiffness of each connecting beam (defined as M/8) is taken as ~
2 1
4 1
and not E to account for the effect of cracking.
J. . L
3. It is assumed that the foundation provides a rigid rotational restraint to the colwnn (where the
l. foundation is designed to resist bending). For a rigid restraint, theoretically k = 0, but in

practice full restraint would not be developed, so a minimum value of 0.1 is taken as the
rotational restraint by the foundation, according to Clause 5.8.3.2(3).
l
- 4. According to Clause 5.8.3(1), if ef is not known, A can be taken as 0.7 (which is based
on ef = 2). From Figure 3.1 (b), for normal cement type (N), and the age of concrete at
i loading of 4 days, coo.ta) would be 3.0 [fck = 25 MPa and h 0 = {2 X (300 X 400)}/
{2 x (300 + 400)} = 171 mm]. According to Clause 5.8.4, ef = coo,t 0 ) MoEqp/MoEd,
where MoEqp and MoEd are the first order bending moments in the quasi permanent load
) and ultimate load combinations respectively. MoEqp/MoEd can be taken as 0.67. So
ef = 2. Although the age at which the concrete is loaded may be higher than 4 days, using
). ef = 2 will be conservative.
L Design of columns Page 97

5. Moments due to geometric imperfections are also considered to be first order moments
according to Clause 5.8.1.
6. As in Example 20, we assume a cover of around 35 mm (XC3 conditions), links of 8 mm and

a bar diameter of 25 mm; then d/h will be ( 400 - 55.5) / ( 400) = 0.86 for major axis
bending and (300 - 55.5)/(300) = 0.82 for minor axis bending.
7. The value of c = 8 is recommended when the first order moment in the colwnn is uniform, as ).
is the case for minor axis initial moments, which are zero due to loading and 7.1 k.Nm due to
geometric imperfections.
8. The column is sh011 about they axis, about which the initial moments are applied; hence there
will be no second order moments about the y axis. On the other hand, it is slender about the z
axis (with second order moments), although no initial moments are applied. Moments due to
geometric imperfections are present about both axes. This biaxial bending case is treated
similarly to the one in Example 20 (through equivalent bending about the minor axis), with
the difference that the initial estimate for second order rnoments is reduced in an iterative
manner. Since hM/ bMy= (400 x 65.4) I (300 x 39.1) = 2.2 and lies within the range 0.2 to 5.0,
the moments about the two axes cannot be treated separately (Table 5.17, IStructE Manual).
9. The second order moment is accounted for separately, as it will reduce with the reduction of
Kr.
10. In general, around 2 iterations are sufficient to arrive at a value of K that is virtually constant.
It shoul d be noted that the factor K should be applied to the original value of M 2 .
11 . The maximum spacing allowed in Clause 9.5.3 should be reduced through a factor 0.6, in
sections within a distance equal to the larger dimension of the column cross-section above or
below a beam or a slab, and also near lapped joints when the maximum diameter of the
longitudinal bar is greater than 14 mm; a minimum of 3 bars evenly placed in the lap length is
required too .
Concluding Notes
12. In braced slender columns such as this one, the additional moments are higher near mid
height, while the initial moments are higher at the ends. Hence, some care has to be exercised
to ensure that the critical moment is chosen for design. In unbraced slender columns however,
both the initial and additional moments are higher near the ends.

,
I
I
I
CHAPTER 7
Design of Foundations
Example 22 - Pad Footing
Design a square pad footing for a 300 mm x 300 mm internal column, which carries an
I
ultimate load of 1100 kN (service load of 780 kN), ifthe allowable bearing pressure of the soil is
150 kN/m 2. Use fck = 25 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa and density of reinforced concrete =
I
I
I
-.
25 kN/m 3 .
,~..
r:
Introductory Notes
1. Eurocode 7 ("Geotechnical design - Part 1: General rules") has three methods for the design
of pad footings (spread footings), namely (i) direct method where separate analyses are
carried out for each limit state; (ii) indirect method where ultimate and serviceability limit
states are considered simultaneously; and (iii) prescriptive method where a presumed bearing
resistance is used for the serviceability limit state and structural design carried out for the
ultimate limit state. In this calculation, the prescriptive method is followed as its procedure is
very similar to that of existing practice in spread fo oting design .
2. Square pad footings are the most common foundation type for columns of framed structures.
). Pad footings are essentially inverted cantilever flat slab elements.
3. The design of pad footings involves the choice of

l
J
(i) footing area (which is based on soil bearing pressure),
(ii) footing depth (which is based on shear resistance) and
(iii)reinforcement to resist bending moment.
J.
- - ... . .
~ ,-,.,.._~-1, ,-.;;
-cat~uiatloiis~: ,~_. ... -~
~ -'.- :;_=_;:-.t .,. . ..
~ . .: - ~
Reference- Output
l Dimensions of base
l Note4
Note 5
.Service load = 780 kN
Expected total load= (1.08)(780) = 842 kN
Required area for base= (842) / (150) = 5.61 m 2
[.
_J
Try a base of 2.4 m x 2.4 m x 0.4 m
Weight of base= (2.4) 2 (0.4)(25) = 57.6 kN
Actual total load= 780 + 57.6= 837.6 kN
Bearing pressure= (837.6)/ (2.4)2 = 145 kN/m2
< 150 kN/m 2; hence OK
Note 6 Preliminary check on effective depth:- footing size
d >10(N)O.s = 10(1100)0.s = 332 mm; 2.4 m x 2.4 m
hence overall depth of 400 mm is OK x 0.4m
L Design of Foundations Page 99

- .... :::
Reference Calculat.~ons_- -.- . ,~ . _ O~t}Ju_t
Design for bending
Ultimate bearing pressure = (1100) / (2.4)2 ' "

Note 7 = 191 kN/m 2
Critical bending moment (at face of column) =
(191)(2.4){(2.4-0.3)/2}2(1/2) = 253 kNm M = 253 kNm
Note 8 Assume a cover of 40 mm (XC 4 conditions). If bar size

of 16 mm is assumed,
dmin = 400 - 40 - 16 - 16/2 = 336 mm dmin = 336 mm
davg = 344 mm davg = 344 mm
Mbal
Appendix A.2
K' = bd2fck = 0.167
EqA.5
Now, K = M/bct2fck
(253 x 10 6 ) /
K= I {(2400)(336) 2(25)}
Eq A.6 z =ct [o.5 + J(o.25 - K/ 1 .134 )]
z = C336) [ o.5 + j( I
0.25 - o.o 37 1 .1 34 )]
z = 325 mm:::; (0.95)(336) = 319 mm

So take z = 319 mm
Eq A.9
As= M/co.87fykz)
_ 253 x10 6 ;
- 0.87x460x319 'i .
= 1982 mm 2
IStructE Cx + 3 d = 3 0 0 + 3 X 3 3 6 = 13 0 8 mm
Manual l.5(cx + 3d) = 1.5(300 + 3 x 336) = 1962 mm
(5.10.7) Ix= 2.4 m > l.5(cx + 3d).
Hence reinforcement should be banded.
So 2/3 of the design reinforcement has to be within
(ex + 3d).
So provide 7T16@200mm in band of 1200 mm bottom r/f
(< 1308 mm); Use (3+3)T12@200 mm in outer 3 T12@200 mm
bands. 7 T16@200 mm
As,prov = 1407 + 678 = 2085 mm 2 (> 1982 mm 2) 3 T12@200 mm
(Also 1407 /2085 = 0.675 > 2/3) (both ways)
Design of Foundations Page 100

J
Reference
f
9.3.1.1(1) As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 ~tm btd but not less
ck
than 0.0013btd
0.26 f;tm btd = 1185mm 2
yk
0.0013btd = 1048mm 2
Table3.1 [ fctm = 2.6MPa]
Reinforcement provided= 2085mm 2 ; hence OK
I Maximum spacing
., r 9.3.1.1(3)
Smax,slabs = 2h :::; 250 mm
2h = 2 x 400 = 800 mm ~ 250 mm
So allowable maximum spacing= 250 mm
Actual maximum spacing = 200 mm; hence OK
l
I
IStructE
Manual
Anchorage length= ( 40)(16) = 640 mm
< (2400-300)/2 - 40 (cover)= 1050 mm; hence OK
r (Table 5.24)
Note 9
Check for vertical line shear
Consider a section at "d" from the column face,

V =(191)(2.4)((2.4 - 0.3)/2 - 0.336} = 327 kN
without links
1
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [cRd,ck(100p1fck) h + kiO'cp] bwd
Eq 6.2.a with a minimum of
Eq 6.2.b VRd,c = ( Vmin + k1 O'cp)bwd
O'cp = Ned/ Ac = 0
I
[20o [20o
6.2.2(1) k = 1 + ~d = 1 + ~336 = 1.77 :::; 2.0
J
As1 2085
Pi = bwd = 2400 x 336 = 0.0026 :::; 0.02
l
/
0.18 0.18
CRd = - - = - - = 0.12
,c Ye 1.5
l k1 = 0.15
- 3j
Vmin - 0.035k 2fck
11z
3 1
= 0.035 x 1.77 /z x 25 /2
J
= 0.41N/mm 2
bw = 2400 mm
t (vmin + k 1crcp)bwd = 331 kN

I .

1
vRd.c = [co.12)(1.77)(0.2 6 x 2s) h + o] (2400)(336) x 10- 3
= 318 kN < 3 31 kN VRd,c = 331 kN
Hence take VRct,c = 331 kN Shear
Note 10 VEd = 327 kN < 331 kN; reinforcement not
6.2.1(4) hence shear reinforcement is not necessary necessary
Check for punching shear (at column face)
Column dimension= 300 mm square

Perimeter of column head= 4 x 300 = 1200 mm
6.4.2(1) (dx+dy) (336+352)
deff = = = 344 mm I ,
Eq 6.32 2 2
VEf = F - 0.3 2 x n = 1100 - 0.3 2 x 191

VEf = 1083 kN
3
v - VEf - 1083 x 10 - 2 2
r,
Ef - u d - 1200 x 344 - 62 N/mm VEf
0
= 2.62 N/mm 2
Crushing strength of the diagonal strut (concrete),
acwUoZV1fcct
6.2.3(3) v -
Rd,max - (cot 8 +tan 8)
Eq 6.9
6.2.2(6)
V = 0.6 [ 1 - fck] = 0.54 = V1
Eq 6.6N 250
fcct = 0.567fck = 0.567x 25 = 14.2 N/mm 2
6.2.3(1) z = 0.9d = (0.9)(344) = 310 mm
6.2.3(3) acw = 1 for non prestressed members.
6.2 .3(2) 8 = 45 (max. allowable)
VRct = (1.0)(1200)(310)(0.54)(14.2) xl0_ 3
,max (cot45+tan45)
= 1426 kN VRct,max
VRd,max 1426 X 10 3 _ 2 = 3.45 N/mm 2
VRct,max = u d = 1200 X 344 - 3.45 N/mm
0
6.4.3(2) VRct,max > VEf; hence OK
.)
Check for punching shear (at distance d)
Note 11 The length of the perimeter r I
'
= ( 4 X 0.3) + (2TI X deff) ct.err
= 1.2 + 2 X TI X 0.344
= 3.36 m
'---'

2
= 0.3 2 + 4 X 0.3 X deff + TIX deff
= 0.09 +4 X 0.3 X 0.344 +TIX 0.344 2
= 0.87 m 2

.. - "' ' -" -. :. . ;.::, . :,~ .. -.:-. ';_-2!,:;?._~~- .
;~:- :~-;.- -, -:;.~ '"" !'" - .. " ..r: . ' - .
Reference . Ca!~9.~a~o!1~.~--- . . > Output . _

I : 6.4.4(2) VEd,redl = F - 0.87 X n = 1100 - 0.87 X 191
Eq 6.48 VEd,redl = 933.8 kN
6.4.4(2) V _ VEd,redl _ 933.8 X 10 3 _ 2 VEct,redl

Eq 6.49 Ed,redl - U1d - 3360 X 344 - 0!:~/mm
= 0.81 N/mm 2
6.4.4(1) without links
1
Eq 6.47 VRct,c = CRct,ck(lOOp1fck) h + klCJcp
With a minimum of
VRct,c = Vmin + klCJcp
). CYcp = Nect/ Ac = 0
~=1+ ~=1.76:52.0
6.4.4(1)
k =1+
6.2.2(1)
PI = )P1xPly = 0.0026 :S 0.02
6.2.2(1) 0.18 0.18
CRd,c = - - = - 1 5 = 0.12 . i
Ye
1 I.
Vmin = 0.035k izfck /2 = 0. 41 N/mm 2

3 I
!. .,,._... ---
I
1
VRct,c = (0.12)(1.76)(0.26 X 25) h + 0 )
2
= 0.39 N/mm < 0. 41 N/mm 2
1 6.4.4(2) So take VRctc as 0.41 N/mm 2
Modification factor= z_ct/~ .
Eq 6.50 So final VRct, 1 = vRd,c x (-Za/a) 1
= 0.41 x (2 x 344/344)
6.4.3(2) = 0.82 N/mm 2 VRd,1
VEct,redl < VRct, 1; hence shear reinforcement against = 0.82 N/mm 2
punching is not necessary. VEct,redl < VRd,1
Check for punching shear (at a distance 2d)

The length of the perimeter = (4 X 0.3) + (Zn X 2deff)
= 1.2 + 2 X TI X 2 X 0.344
= 5.52 m
= 0.3 2 + 4 X 0.3 X 2deff + TIX (2deff) 2
l = 0.09 + 4 X 0.3 X 2 X 0.344 +TIX (2 X 0.344) 2
= 2.4 m 2
r 6.4.4(2) VEd,red2 = F- 2.4Xn=1100-2.4X191

VEdred2 = 641.6 kN
I
I. 6.4.4(2)
_ VEd,red2 _ 641.6 X 10 3 _
VEct,red2 - Uzd - 5520 X 344 - 0.34 N/mm
2 VEct,red2
Eq 6.49 = 0.34 N/mm 2
vRd,c = o. 41 N/mm 2

L
. . .. .. / ..
Reference ..
.
'
--.,c~ictiiatio~s
.. - . ..
ori,ti}iit
Modification factor= 2d/a
6.4.4(2) So final VRct, 2 = VRct,c x (2d/a)
VRct,2
Eq 6.50 = 0.41 x (2 x 344/688)
= 0.41 N/mm 2
= 0.41 N/mm 2
VEct,red2 < VRct,2; hence shear reinforcement against
VEct,red2 < VRct,2
6.4.3(2)
punching is not necessary.
Punching shear /f
not necessary
4. Soil bearing pressures are given in terms of service loads. Hence, service loads have to be
used to determine the footing area. Service loads can be approximately obtained from ultimate
loads by dividing the latter by 1.40 in reinforced concrete structures. In order to estimate
ultimate loads from service loads however, it is safer to factor the latter by 1.45.
, ..
5. The weight of the footing itself cannot be known until it is sized. An allowance of 8% of the
column load is generally satisfactory for obtaining a first estimate of footing weight, which
should subsequently be calculated accurately. Another approach is to first estimate a depth (in
this case 0.4 m) and reduce the allowable bearing pressure by the corresponding weight per
unit area (i.e. 0.4 x 24 = 9.6 kN/m 2 ) , before finding the footing area.
6. Thi s fonnul a is not dimensionally homogeneous and can be used only ifN is in kN and din
mm. It is based on BS8110 punching shear considerations for commonly used pad footings. If
there is moment transfer to the footing as well, used> (11.S)(N) 05 . 1.
7. As the weight of the footing is considered to be a uniformly distributed load which is taken
directly by the soil reaction, it should not be considered when designing for the ultimate limit
states of flexure and shear.
8. The Table 4. 1 exposure class XC4 (cyclic wet and dry) is assumed. This is because sometimes
11 11
the footing could come into contact with ground water. The minimum value of d should be
11 11
used in the design for flexure and vertical line shear, while the average value of d can be
used in checking for punching shear.
\
9. If the distance between the column face and the end of the footing is smaller than the
anchorage length, the bars will have to be bent up near the end of the footing; otherwise, as in
this example, they can be straight.
10. The line shear check is satisfied even without reducing V Ed by the factor ~ = d/2d = 0.5
(Clause 6.2.2(2).
11. In most cases, punching shear is more critical than vertical line shear. Although the first
critical perimeter for punching shear is at a distance '2d' from the loaded area, Clause 6.4.2(2)
says that control periineters at a distance less than '2d' should be considered when the
concentrated force is opposed by a high pressure (soil pressure on a base in this case). So it is

r
r
I
better to check the punching shear resistance at distances 'd' (where the shear resistance
I can be factored by 2d/d - Equation 6.50) and '2d' (where the factor is just unity).
I.
I Furthermore, if a distance 'd' is not available from the critical perimeter to the end of the
footing, it is advisable to neglect the contribution from reinforcement in calculating the shear
J
resistance of concrete.
Concluding Notes
I 12. In this example, the line shear stress at a distance 'd' from the column face did not require a
I reduction factor although the punching shear stress at that distance did; this highlights the fact
that punching shear is more critical in general.
I
I 13. If the footing carries a bending moment in addition to the axial load, the maximum and
minimum pressures under the footing will be given by (1/BL)(N 6M/L), with symbols
-'.'
~ ..

_.,
(
I
having usual meanings. The maximum pressure should be kept below the allowable bearing
I
pressure. If the difference between maximum and minimum pressures is small (say up to 20%
of the maximum pressure), it may be convenient to design for bending and vertical shear by
I assuming that the pressure distribution is uniform and equal to the maximum pressure.
I
14. Where the design for punching shear is concerned, when the loading is eccentric, vEd,red
should be multiplied by a factor ~= (i + k MEctu )

VEct,rectW
according to Clause 6.4.4(2). The,
value of~ can be approximately obtained from Figure 6.21 N.
}.
.l
!.
[:
L
Example 23 - Combined Footing
Let us assume that an external column is flush with the property line and that the footings for the
external and first internal columns have to be combined, as shown. While the internal column
carries an ultimate axial load of 1100 kN, the external column carries an ultimate moment of 60
kN m in addition to an ultimate axial load of 60 0 kN. Design the footing if the allowable bearing
pressure of the soil is 150 kN/m 2. Use fck = 25 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
0.3m 4.7m 0.3m

~ ~
I I
600 kN 1~0 kN
A
60 kNm
c +
I D E
I )
Introductory Notes
I. The situation described above is often found in crowded urban areas where buildings are
constructed on very small plots of land.
2. It is difficult to provide an isolated pad footing for the external column, because of eccentric
loading on the footing . Hence, it can be combined with the first internal column footing as
shown above.
- . ' ~. I:;,_-
. ...
.
Caleula tions,~ _
Service loads
... Note 3
External column load = (600)/(1.4) = 429 kN
External column moment = (60)/(1.4) = 42.9 kNm
Internal column load = (1100)/(1.4) = 786 kN
I_
Dimensions of footing
Distance of C.of G. from A is given by x, where

(786 + 429)x =(429)(0.15) + 42.9+(786)(5 .15)
Hence, x = 3.4 m; therefore, for uniform pressure under L
Note 4 base, use a base of length (2)(3.4) = 6.8 m
Note 5 If we assume a thickness of 0.8 m for the base, the

allowable bearing pressure is .
150 - (0.8)(25) = 130 kN/m 2
Width ofhase required = (786+429) / (6.8)(130) footing size
= 1.37 m 6.8 m x 2.0 m
Note 6 Use base of 6.8 m x 2.0 m x 0.8 m x 0.8 m

J
r
I
I
rI Reference Calculations:,~
.,
.,
. _, : ,.
. "_'. .. ,- ~ outiJu.i
r
I
Analysis of footing
I Assuming that the C.of G. for ultimate loads is the same

I as that for service loads, the footing can be idealized as
II .
follows:-
udl = (1100+600) / (6.8) = 250 kN/m
I
A fu ::::J6Sm
600 kN
0 kNm
'C?~
1100 k :
c
X-j
E
Note 7
.:;:~ /.
Max. moment at C = (250)(1.65) 2 / 2 = 340 kNm Downward design
To find max. moment in AC, hogging moment
Mx = -(250) x 2 /2 + llOO(x - 1.65) at C=340 kNm
I
I
dMx
= -(125)x 2 + (1 lOO)x - 1815
dx = -(250)x + 1100 = 0,
we have x = 4.4 m Upward design
Mmax = -(125)(4.4) 2 +(1100)(4.4)-1815 sagging moment in
= 605 kNm AC= 605 kNm
Max. shear force at C = 1100 - (250) (1.65)
= 688 kN
Shear force at A = 600 kN
Design for bending

Note 8
Assume cover of 40 mm, bar size (longitudinal) of 25
mm; hence, d = 800 - 40 - 25/2 = 747.5 mm
!.
(Section AC)
Eq A.5
K = M/bd2fck
(605 x 10 6 ) /
K= I {(2000)(747.5) 2 (25)}
Appendix A.2 K = 0.022 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
EqA.6 z = d [o.5 + j(o.25- K/i. 134 )]
z = (747.SJ [o.s + J(o.zs - 0022/u

34)]
z = 733 mm$ (0.95)(747.5) = 710 mm
So take z= 710 mm

Reference - ~'.. - - r
Calculations
' , '":" ',-:", ~ -:._ ~.'
EqA.9 As= M/co .87fykz)

_ 605 x10 6 ;
- 0.87 x 460 x 710
= 2129 mm 2 longitudinal top

Use 8T20 (As,prov = 2512 mm 2 ) - on top surface; steel in span AC -
8T20
(At C)
(340 x 10 6 ) /
EqA.5
K= I {(2000)(747.5) 2 (25)}
K = 0.012 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced f'
I
Appendix A.2
z = d [o.5 + j(o.25 - K/i. 134)]
Eq A.6
z = (747.5) [o.s + j(o.2s- 0.012/i. 134 )]
z = 740 mm$ (0.95)(747.5) = 710 mm
So take z = 710 mm
As,req = M/(0.87fykz)
Eq A.9
_ 340 x10 6 ;
- 0.87 x 460 x 710
= 1197 mm 2 - on bottom surface

f~;~ btd
I__
9.3.1.1(1) As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 but not less
than 0.0013btd
0.26 f;tm
btd = 2197 mm 2
yk
0.0013btd = 1944 mm 2 1
[ fctm = 2.6 MPa J l

'-'
Table 3.1 Minimum reinforcement required= 2197 mm 2
9.3 .1.1(3) Use 8T20 (As,prov = 2512mm 2 ) - on bottom surface; longitudinal

Note 9 bottom steel at
Bar spacing will be around (2000 - 2x50) /7 = 271 mm
support C - 8T20
IStructE
Manual l.S(c + 3d) = 1.5(300 + 3 x 747.5) longitudinal r/f to
(5.10.7) = 3814 mm > l = LO m; hence be evenly spaced
longitudinal reinforcement can be evenly distributed.

r - - -. : _--.. . ..,_:_~ ;." . - - : . :~. j" ' ..
Reference ~ -_-- ~- ~~ Galculati(JnS_

.. ::- :.. , -
I . . :'
. .._. ;.. ..: .~ ,. .' .. - -
Transverse direction
2
M = (- -
250) {(2.0 - 0.3)} (1)
2 2
= 45 kN/m z
d = 747.5 - 25/2 - 20/2 = 725 mm
(asswning bar size of 20 mm)
It can be found that the reinforcement needed is the
minimwn amount required.
f
9.3.1.1(1) Asmin has to be greater than 0.26 cftm btd but not less
ck
I~ than 0.0013btd
0.26 f;tm btd = 1065 mm 2 /m
..
, "' ;
yk
0.0013btd = 943 mm 2 /m
r Table 3.1 ( f ctm = 2.6 MPa]
Minimum reinforcement required = 1065 mm 2 /m Transverse bottom
use T20@300 mm (As.prov= 1047 mm /m) 2 steel - T20 @ 300
I. mm, to be evenly
p = 0.0014 spaced.
I Anchorage length= (20)(40) = 800 mm
IStructE < (2000 - 300)/2 - 40(cover) = 810 mm ; hence OK
Manual
This steel too can be evenly distributed, as it is nominal
r (Table 5.24) reinforcement; the same nominal stee l can also be used as
distribution steel for the top longitudinal bars.
! I 4.7m I
:
I I
I I
I
1
..
....
STZS
~I
1 I I
I
I :
I
T2Q@22Q::::. s I I
f.
l'. :
1~:
I~ I
6.8m
STZS .I
I
Check for vertical line shear

I In the longitudinal direction, check at a distance
'd' (= 747.5 mm) from the internal column face.
1 v = 688 - {(688 + 600)/(5.0)}(0.15 + 0.7475)
= 457 kN
Design value of shear resistance of the co"ncrete slab
r 6.2.2(1)
without links
VRd,c = [cRct,ck(100p1fck)1h + kiCJcp] bwd
Eq 6.2.a
I
'-
Eq 6.2.b with a minimum of
VRd,c = ( Vmin +kl CJcp)bwd
CJcp = Nect/ Ac = 0
1

= i+ ~ = 1 + J~~ = 1 s2 :e: 2 o
0
6.2.2(1)
k 5
As1 2512
PI= bwd = 2000 X 747.5 = 0.0017 :5 0.02
0.18 0.18
CRct,e = - - = - = 0.12
Ye 1 5
k1 = 0.15
3 1
Vmin = 0.035k izfek /z
/z x 25 1/2
3
= 0.035 x 1.52
= 0.33 N/mm 2 I I
bw = 2000 mm
( Vmin + k1 CYep)bwd = 493.4 kN

VRct,c = [co.12)(1.52)(0.17 x 25) 1/J + o] (2000)(747)x10- 3 VRct,c = 493 kN
= 439.2 kN < 493.4 kN
Shear
6.2.1(4) Hence take VRct,e = 493.4 kN reinforcement not
Note 10 VEct = 457 kN < 493.4 kN necessary
So shear reinforcement is not necessary
In the transverse direction, a distance "d" from the column
face is virtually at the edge of the footing; hence OK
Check for punching shear (at column face)
Colunm dimension= 300 mm square

Perimeter of column head= 4 x 300 = 1200 mm
6.4.2(1) (dx+dy) (747.5+725) ,_
Eq 6.32 deff = = = 736 mm
2 2
Shear force at face of the column = VEr = 1100 kN
3
- VEf - 1100 x 10 - 2
VEf.
VEf - Uad - 1200 x 736 - 1.25 N/mm
= 1.25 N/mm 2 L..J
Crushing Strength of the diagonal strut (concrete), ' 1
6.2.3(3) O'.ewU~ZV1fect
Eq 6.9 VRct.max = (cot 8 +tan 8)
6.2.2(6)
Eq 6.6N V = 0.6 [ 1 - fek ] = 0.54 = V1
250
fed = 0.567fek =0.567 X 25 =
14.2 N/mm 2
6.2.3(1) z = 0.9d = (0.9)(736) = 662 mm
6.2.3(3) O'.cw = 1 for non prestressed members.
6.2.3(2) 8 = 45 '(max. allowable)

'
I
i.
. . .
.. . -
r Reference Otitj>ut
[ I .
VRct = (1.0)(1200)(662)(0.54)(14.2) x _3
l. ,max (cot 45 + tan 45) 10
( . = 3046 kN
r
i
I 6.4.3(2) VRct,max 3046 X 10 3 VRct,max
VRct,max = U0 d = 1200 X 736 = 3.45 N/mm 2
= 3.45 N/mm 2 > VEf; hence OK
Check for punching shear at a distanced (Column CD)

The length of the perimeter
= (4 X 0.3) + (2TI X deff) derr
= 1.2 + 2 X TIX 0.736
_. , ( .
I
(. = 5.82 m L
derr

= 0.3 2 + 4 X 0.3 X deff + TIX der/
= 0.09 + 4 X 0.3 X 0.736 +TIX 0.736 2
= 2.67 m 2
6.4.4(2) VEd,red = F - 2.67 x n = 1100 - 2.67 x 125
VEct red = 766 kN
_ VEd,red _ 766 X 10 3 _ 2
6.4.3(6) VEct,red - U1 d - 5820 X 736 - 0.18 N/mm VEct,red,eff
= 0.21 N/mm 2
Figure 6.21 N VEct,red,eff = ~vEd,red = 1.15 X 0.18 = 0.21 N/mm 2
Note 11
, Design value of shear resistance of the foundation
I .
I slab without links
I
6.4.4(1) 1
' Eq 6.47 VRct,c = CRct,ck(lOOp1fck) h + k 1Gcp
I
I With a minimum of
t VRct,c = Vmin + k1 Gcp
Gcp = Nect/ Ac = 0
!
I.
,.
I
6.4.4(1)
k= 1+ ~= 1+ J* = 1.52 $ 2.0
P1 =..)P1xP1y = ..Jco.0017)(0.0014) = 0.0015:::; 0.02

0.18 0.18
CRd,c = Yc =Ls = 0.12
3 1
Vmin = 0.035k /2fck / 2 = 0. 33 N/mm 2
1
VRctc = (0.12)(1.52)(0.15 X 25) h + 0
= 0.28 N/mm 2 < 0. 33 N/mm 2
So take vRd,c as 0. 33 N/mm 2
6.4.4(2) Modificat:ion factor= 2d/a
So final VRct cf= VRct c X (2d/a)

L
Reference Caiculatfons Output
= 0.33 x (2 x 736/736) VRct,cf
2
= 0.66 N/mm > VEct,red,ef6 hence reinforcement = 0.66N/mm 2
against punching shear is not necessary.
Check for punching shear at a distance d (Column AB)

The length of the perimeter
= (3 X 0.3) + (TIX deff)
= 0.9 +TIX 0.736
= 3.21 m -
= 0.3 2 + 3 X 0.3 X deff + 0.5 X TIX der/
= 0.09 + 3 X 0.3 X 0.736 + 0.5 X TIX 0.736 2
= 1.60 m 2 I J
VEct,red = F - 1.60 X n
6.4.4(2) = 600 - 1.6 x 125
VEct,red = 400 kN
_ VEct,red _ 400 X 10 3 _ 2
VEct,red - U1d - 3210 X 736 - 0.17 N/mm
VEct,red,eff
VEct,red,eff = ~VEct,rect=1.4x 0.17 = 0.24 N/mm 2
6.4.3(6) = 0.24 N/mm 2
VRct c = 0. 33 N/mm 2 (from before)
6.4.4(2)
Modification factor= 2d/a
Note 11
So final VRct,cf = VRct,c X (2d/ a)
= 0.33 x (2 x 736/736)
= 0.66 N/mm 2 > VEct,red,eff; hence VRct,cf
reinforcement against punching shear is not necessary. = 0.66 N/mm 2
Since the critical perimeter that is 2d from both columns
Note 12 is outside the footing, there is no need to check for Shear r/f not
L..J
punching shear at that distance. needed
l J
3. Where service loads are not specified or known, they can be estimated by dividing ultimate
loads by 1.40 for reinforced concrete structures. When converting service to ultimate loads, it
is safer to multiply the former by 1.45. I f
LJ
4. If the footing dimensions are given, as opposed to being designed, the pressure distribution
under the base may not be uniform.
5. This base thickness is fairly high, and is governed primarily by shear considerations. If the
distance between columns is large, bending moment considerations will also require a fairly
deep base.

6. This fairly large width has been chosen to reduce the pressure under the footing and satisfy the
shear criteria. Although increasing the depth is generally more efficient than increasing the
width, having a large depth may also cause excessive build up of heat of hydration
temperatures, leading to thermal cracking.
7. Assuming the column loads to be point loads is conservative. In reality, the load will be spread
over a finite area and the resulting bending moments and shear forces at the column faces will
be somewhat smaller than those obtained from this analysis. In addition, the design moment at
C could be taken as that at the face of the column, although that has not been done here.
I
I
I 8. The argument used to choose the cover is the same as that in Note 8 of Example 22.
9. Where minimum steel is used, it would probably be acceptable to use the spacing of 3h
) (3x800 = 2400) :S 400 mm, even in areas of maximum moment (Clause 9.3.1.1(3)).
\1~
10. At a distance d from the face of the column if VEct is more than VRd.c> then VRct,c could be
)" modified based on Clause 6.4.4(2). If VEct is now less than the modified VRd,c shear
reinforcement is not necessary, but the vertical line shear check should be repeated a distance
2d from the column face.
11. The ~value is taken as 1.15 for the internal column and 1.4 for the edge column, as per
Clause 6.4.3(6).
J .
12. If the perimeter or section at which shear should be checked falls outside the footing, the
footin g can be considered safe fo r shear.
Concluding Notes
13 . The analysis of the above footing has been performed assuming that both footing and
subgrade are rigid . If elastic foundation assumptions had been used, the soil pressure near the
columns (i .e. loaded areas) would increase, but the midspan bending moment would decrease.
1-
l
!(.
l
!.
Example 24 - Pile Cap
A two-pile group of pile diameter 500 mm and spacing 1250 mm centres supports a
450 mm square column carrying an ultimate load of 2500 kN. Design the pile cap, using
concrete of fck = 25 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
Introductory Notes
1. The minimum centre-to-centre distance for piles is twice the least width of piles for end
bearing piles and thrice the least width of piles for friction piles.
2. A pile cap can be considered as a deep beam, and the most appropriate way to analyse forces
is to consider truss action in the pile cap.
Reference Calculations Output .

Pile cap dimensions
Use an outstand beyond the piles of half the pile diameter.

Hence, pile cap dimensions are:
length= 1250 + 500 + 500 = 2250 mm dimensions
width= 500 + 500 = 1000 mm 2250 mm x
Try overall depth of 700 mm ; hence, 1000 mm x
Note 3 effective depth = 700 - 40 - 25/2 = 647.5 mm 700 mm
> (1250)/2; hence OK
N
Truss action
The force Tis given by c d

Note 4 T = N.l/(2)d i i
= c2soo)(625) / (2)(647.5)
= 12 07 kN
.,.
t ' T '
,
t '.
As= (1207 xl03) / (0.87)(460) N-l ~2--,...,.----~~ /2
= 3016 mm2 21
Use 7 T25 (As= 3437 mm2) main steel
Note 5 Banding is not required, as pile spacing< (3)(pile dia.) 7T25 I
L,
Note 6 r/f spacing = (1000 - 80 - 32 - 25)/6 = 144 mm (As=:== 3437 mm2)
Anchorage
IStructE Anchorage length required beyond centre-line of pile is

Manual given by (40)(25)(3016/3437) = 878 mm
(Table 5.24) Stress in r/f= (0.87)(460)(3016/3437) = 351 N/mm2
When turning bars upwards, a~sume that bend starts at
edge of pile.
Stress at start of bend = (351)(878-250)/(878)
= 251 N/mm 2

Reference Calculations Output '
~
8.3(3) Mandrel diameter,m minshould be such that \ 1- I - . I

Eq 8.1 (Cl/ab)+ 1/(2)) \
Note 7 m min 2:: Fbt f
cd \~
I I
0 0 1
-:~
Critical value for ab= 40 + 16(hor.loops) + 25/2
= 69 mm < 144 mm
"' . > (251 x 491) ((1/ 69 ) + l/(( 2)C 25 )))
't'm,mm - (0.567)(25)
1. cpm,min ::=:: 299.9 mm
m,min
., So use m min = 300 mm
,; .. = 300 mm
r
, \"'
.:
Note 8 If we start the bend as close as possible to the edge of pile
cap, length from C/L of pile to start of bend
= 500 - 40 - 16 - (300/2) = 294 mm
i 8.4.1 (2)
Vertical length available = 647.5 - 40 - 150
= 457.5 mm
Figure 8.1.a Total anchorage available (along the center line)
r- = 294 + 457.5 + (n/4)(300)
= 987 mm > 878 mm; hence OK Anchorage OK
l: Check for punchin g shear
3
- 2500 x 10 - 2
) VEf - (4)(450)(647.5) - 2.15 N/mm
Crushing Strength of the diagonal strut (concrete),
l
.. 6.2.3(3)
Eq 6.9
UcwUaZV1fcd
VRd,max = (cot 8 +tan 8)
V = 0.6 [ 1 - fck] = 0.54 = V1

t 6.2.2(6)
Eq 6.6N 250
fed = 0.567fck= 0.567x 25 = 14.2 N/mm 2
z = 0.9d = (0.9)(647.5) = 582.8 mm
acw = 1 for non prestressed members.
l 6.2 .3(3)
6.4.1 (3) 8 = 45 (max. allowable)
i VRd
max
(1.0) ( 4x450) (582.8) (0.54) (14.2)
=
(cot45+tan45)
xio- 3
= 4022 kN
r. v -
VRd,max
=
4022 X 10 3
Rd,max - U0 d 1800 X 647.5
6.4.3(2) = 3.45 N/mm 2 > VEf; hence OK
1
Since spacing of piles< 3(pile dia.), no further check
Note 9
L is required.

L
.. -
Reference Calculations ~". . f -"-
.. ... ' . ..
~ - ' .-! ... _.,. -';.. ~ .
~- - Output
Check for vertical line shear +I+ i/,5 = 100
VEd (at critical section) ' qi / Iooc

=2500 I 2 = 1250 kN 1~ i~ I
Note I 0 av= 625 - 150 - 225 = 250 mm 52s 625
6.2.2(6) av/2d = 250/(2)(647.5) = 0.193 < 0.5d = 324 nun
VEdm = .YEct (324/(2x647.5)) = 0.25VEd = 313 kN
without links
1
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [CRct,ck(lOOp1fck) h + k1 O'cp] bwd
Eq 6.2.a with a minimum of ' '
Eq 6.2.b VRd,c = ( Vmin + k1 O'cp)bwd
O'cp = Neal Ac= 0
6.2.2(1) k = i+ ~ = i+ J~~05 = 1.56 ,; z.o

As1 3437
P1 = bwd = 1000 x 647.5 = 0.0053 ::::; 0.02
0.18 0.18
CRd = - - = - - = 0.12
,c Ye 1.5
kl = 0.15
3
. = 0 035k /2fc kl/z
v min
3 1
= 0.035 x 1.56 /z x 25 /z
= 0.34 N/mm 2
( Vmin + k1 O'cp)bwd = 220 kN
VRct,c = [(0.12)(1.56)(0.53 x 25/h] (1000)(647.5) x10- 3
I )
= 2 8 7 kN > 2 2 0 kN
6.2.1(4) Hence take VRd,c = 286.8 kN Shear r /f can be
Note 11 VEctm = 313 kN <t. 286.8 kN; but close, hence OK ignored
Distribution steel
IStructE Minimum reinforcement = 0.0015bh
Manual = 0 .0015 x 1000 x 700 ~ 1050 mm 2 Distribution steel
(5.10.10) Use T16@200 mm (As= 1005 mm 2 /m, but enough) T16@200 mm
This steel can also be bent up like the main steel
Horizontal binders
Note 12 Use 25% of main steel.
As = (0.25)(3016)
= 754 mm 2
/T 2:i 1nr1in
'-r.==========:;;iII
~
II
II
n binders
4T ' 6
/
II
I
Horizontal
binders
Use 4T16 (As= 804 mm2) 4T16
These binders will tie the
main and distribution steel.

r
3. The criterion used is that the effective depth is equal to at least half the distance between pile
I .
I centres. When using truss theory, this will result in a compressive strut of 45 minimwn
I. inclination. The cover value has been chosen as per Note 8 of Example 22.
4. If the width of the colwnn is accounted for, the value of tensile force will be a little less. This
r is given some treatment in "Allen, A.H., Reinforced concrete design to BS 8110 simply
explained, E. & F.N. Spon, London, 1988".
5. Clause 3.11.4.3 of BS 8110 states that only the reinforcement within 1.5 times the pile
diameter from the center of a pile should be considered to constitute a tension member of the
truss. That practice is followed in this example.
:. .
...,
- 6. Allowance is made here for side cover of 40 mm and horizontal binders of 16 mm diameter.
r
t:;.
7. Minimum mandrel diameter is specified to avoid damage to the reinforcement and crushing
of concrete inside the bend of the bar.
I 8. We start the bend closer to the edge of the pile cap than assumed in the bend radius calculation
- this is to achieve as great a length for anchorage as possible within the geometry of the pile
) cap. We do not recalculate the stress at the start at the bend; this approach is conservative.
9. If the spacing of the pile is greater than 3 x (pile diameter), then the pW1ching shear should
i. be checked considering a critical perimeter of 2d from the colwrn1 face (BS 8110, Cl ause
3.11.4.5).
10. The critical section for the shear is assumed to be located 20% of the diameter of the pile
inside the face of the pile (BS 8110, Figure 3.23).
11. The effective depth chosen was only slightly greater than half the pile centre spacing, so this
check is marginally violated.
!
(.
12. This provision is also given by Allen, referred to in Note 4 above. The main steel required (as
opposed to provided) can be used in the calculation.
Concluding Notes
13 . It can be shown that less steel is required if Beam Theory is used. Furthermore, the anchorage
requirement beyond the centre line of pile is much less. However, Truss Theory probably
describes more accurately the actual behaviour of the pile cap.
14. If the spacing of piles exceeds 3 times the pile diameter, an additional check for punching
shear has to be made, and the pile cap has to be considered as being "banded" for the
r.
( distribution of tension steel and check forvertical line shear. Provisions are given in BS 8110,
Clauses 3.11.4.4 and 3 .11.4.5.

L
CHAPTER 8
Design of Staircases
Example 25 - Staircase (between Beams)
A staircase has to span between two beams, which are 3.0 m apart in plan. The difference
between the two levels is 2.0 m. Assuming that the staircase is sheltered and that it is heavily
used, design the staircase, using fck = 20 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa and density of reinforced
concrete= 25 kN/m 3 . Assume top finishes (on tread only) as 0.5 kN/m2 and the soffit plaster as
0.25 kN/m2.
Introductory Notes
1. Staircases are essentially inclined slabs. The major difference in design approach is that the
loading has to be obtained as the loading in plan.
2. In this particular example, the layout of the staircase has to be designed as well .
)
Reference Calculations Outpu t
Choice of layout
)
Let us choose 12 stairs.
Then, rise (R) = 2000/12 = 167 mm rise= 167 mm
going (G) = 3000/12 = 250 mm going= 250 mm
Note 3 Also 2R + G = (2)(167) + 250 = 584 mm
(approx. 600 mm; hence OK)
Use nosing of 25 mm, so that tread= 275 mm tread= 275 mm
Waist thickness
Note 4 Assume trial span/ effective depth of 30, for a one way
heavily loaded continuous slab.
Table 4.1 Ifwe assume cover= 25 mm (indoor expo.sure XCl) and h = 130 mm
Table 4.4N bar diameter= 12 mm, we can choose h =130 mm and d = 99 mm
d = 130 - 25 - 12/2 = 99 rrim
BS EN 1992-1-2 2 hour fire resistance is available (h > 120 mm; a> 20mm)
(Table 5.8)
Loading (for 1 m wide strip)
Note 5 Factor for slope = (R2 + G2)0.s / G

= f(167)2 + (250)210.s / (250) = 1.20
Design of Staircases Page 118

I ' . .:, I ~ ' ' : ' , ' _\
,---=/?-~=--=-~
\ - /
I t_i 0 (
'\
F \
\ \j,'
(\ (>(; ({..I
l(
'
\ '~
~ /t / 1 ( ~\ .l I c( \ r ~ '-
V' I
, ( -( I
r'.
,.- v('\ )\ r
, , )
\
\
(\
I
Reference -
Calcufatlbn~~t ~.
-.. ,,. -:: . -. ' _--- ,:! .~ ...., . -~ ~ ...... -, - - J ... -
Output:.
~
Factor for overlap= T/G == 275/250 = 1.1
Waist = (0.13)(1)(25)(1.2) = 3.90 kN/m

Steps = (1/2)(0.167)(1)(25)(1.1) = 2.30 kN/m
Top finishes= (0.5)(1)(1.1) = 0.55 kN/m
Soffit plaster= (0.25)(1)(1.20) = 0.30 kN Im
Total dead load = 7.05 kN Im
i Note 6 Imposed load = ( 4.0)(1) = 4.0 kN/m
Design load= (1.35)(7.05) + (1.5)(4.0) = 15.52 kN/m design udl =
15.52 kN/m
).
Design for bending
Note 7 M (span and support) = F.I / 10

= {(15.52)(3.0)}(3.0) / 10 = 13.97 kNm/m
EqA.5 K = M/bd2fck
(13.97 x 10 6 ) /
K= I {(1000)(99) 2 (20)}
Appendi x A .2 = 0.071 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
Eq A.6 z = d [o.s + j(o.2s - K/i. 134 )]
z = (99) [0 .5 + j (0.25 - 0.07lfi.134)l

z = 92.4 mm :5 (0.95)(99) = 94 mm
So take z = 92.4 mm
Eq A.9
As = M /co .87fykz)
_ 13.97 x10 6 ;
l
\ .
- 0.87 x 460 x 92.4
= 378 mm 2 Main steel

Hence use T12@250 mm (As.prov = 452 mm /m) 2 T12@250 mm
2
As = 452 mm /m
Check for minimum reinforcement
9.3.1.1(1) As .prov has to be greater than 0.26 ffctm btd but not less
ck
Note 8
than 0.0013btd
0.26 f;tm btd = 123 mm 2 /m
yk
l Table 3.1 0.0013btd = 129 mm 2 /rn

[ fctm = 2.2MPa]
Miniml:lm reinforcement needed = 129 mm 2 /m,
l < 452 mm 2 /m; hence OK
L Design of Staircases Page 119

Reference Calculations .. _ QJ!tpUt .. .
Maximum spacing
Smax,slabs= 2h S 250mm
9.3.1.1(3) 2h = 2 x 130 = 260 mm > 250 mm
= 250 mm; hence OK
As,req 378
7.4.2(2) p =~ = 1000 x 99 = 0.0038 > 0.0025
p' = 0
7.4.2(2) Po = jG x 10- 3 = 0.0045 > p;
so use Eq 7.16.a
Table 7.4N K = 1.5

~Po + 3.2...;~(Po
3
7.4.2(2) d1 = K [ 11+1.5,,tfck p
fck p- 1) /zl
Eq 7.16.a 3
1 [ 0.0045
d = 1 5 11 + 1 5 -J20 0.003 8
(0.0045
+ 3.z-J20 0.0038 - 1
) /zl
I
d = 30.11
7.4.2(2) 310 500As,prov 500 x 452

Eq7.17
= 460 x 378 = 1. 3 0 :=:; 1. 5
. So allowable span/effective depth

(-dI) all = ,.J<: / '!2
30.11 x l.lL =' 33.72 < 40 (one way cts)
f'
]) 3000
(d act= 99" = 30.3 < 33.72; hence OK Deflection O.K
Check for shear
V = (0.6)F = (0.6){(15.52)(3)} = 27.94 kN/m

Note 9 Design value of shear resistance of the concrete slab
without links
1
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [cRd,ck(lOOp1fck) h + kiCJcp] bwd
Eq 6.2.a
with a minimum of
Eq 6.2.b
VRd,c = ( Vmin +kl Gcp)bwd

J
._ ,.
) -
Reference . Calculations Outp!lt
CTcp = Nect/ Ac = 0
I
r [200 [200
6.2.2(1) k= 1 + ~d- = 1 + ~99 = 2.42 $ 2.0
.. I
I As1 452
P1 = bwd = (lOOO) ( 99 ) = 0.0046 ~ 0.02
0.18 0.18
CRct,c = - - = - 15 = 0.12
Ye
k1 = 0.15
3 1
,
. = 0 035k 12fck
v mm /z
.
3 1
'~::
= 0.035 x 2 /2 x 20 /2
= 0.44 N/mm 2
bw = 1000 mm
( Vmin + k1 CTcp)bwd = 43.6 kN
r vRd,c = [co.12)(2)(0.46 x 20)

1
h + o] (1000)(99)x10- 3
= 49.4 kN /m > 43.6 kN /m
j. Hence take VRct,c = 49.4 kN/m
6.2.1(4) VEct = 27.94 kN/m < 49.4 kN/m; Shear r/f not
hence shear reinforcement is not necessary. required.
1.
Distribution steel
f~tm btd but not less
l
J
9.2.1.1(1)
Table3.1
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26
than 0.0013btd [fctm = 2.2 MPa]
ck
Minimum reinforcement needed= 129 mm 2 /m,

). 9.3 .1.1 (3) Maximum spacing of reinforcement= 3h = 3 x 99 =
297 mm ( < 400 mm)
)
Distribution steel
f,
(, .
So provide T8@300 mm
As.prov= 168 mm 2 /m > 129 mm 2 /m; hence OK
T8@300 mm
0.9m
r_,
, ,
<> - . Tl2@250 (3)
) Note 10 T8@300 ~~
/~~
\
:;
0.9m ~ .
L , ' - - - - 7 ' - ' - /.-;::;/ -...____ Tl2@250 (1)

-...,.L
,,//
~~
0
8N
r Tl2@250
~~/
(2)
!."
ET
,
3000

3. In general the rise should vary from around 150 mm for public stairways to around 175 mm
for private stairways. The going should vary from 300 mm for public stairways to 250 mm
for private stairways.(2R + G) should be kept as close as possible to 600 mm. A nosing can
be provided so that the tread is greater than the going, thus making for greater user comfort.
4. Although the value used in Example 13 for a continuous one way slab was 3 5, a ratio of 3 0 is
used here, because the loading is much heavier - the waist carries the load of the steps, in
addition to its own weight on an incline, and also a high imposed load.
5. The waist and soffit plaster have thicknesses that are measured perpendicular to the incline.
Hence their load in plan will be greater by a factor of (R 2 + G2) 0.s /G. The steps and tread
finishes have 25 mm overlaps for each 250 mm length in plan, because of the provision of a
nosing. Hence their load will have to be factored by T /G. This factor can be ignored for the
imposed load, because it can be argued that the entire tread will not be available for standing.
6. The upper limit for staircase imposed loads is 4.0 kN/m 2 - see Table 6.2 of "Eurocode 1:
Actions on structures - Part 1-1: General actions - Densities, self weight, imposed loads for
building".
7. For a staircase having continuity, we can assume that both the span and support moments are
approximately F.1/10.
8. Staircases are generally heavily loaded (see Note 4 above) , unlike horizontal slabs. Hence, the
check for minimum steel is not very critical.
9. Taking Shear Force as (0.6)F is conservative for staircases such as this. In any case, as for
most slabs, staircases will not require shear reinforcement.
10. When detailing reinforcement, care should be taken not to bend tension steel in a way that an
inside comer can get pulled out. Hence for example, bars should be continued from the
bottom face of the lower slab to the top face of the waist. Bar types (2) and (3) can be taken
horizontal distances of (0.3)1 into the waist from the faces of the beams - see Concrete
Society, Detailing (Figure 10). Bar types (1 ), (2) and (3) can be continued into the lower and l-
upper slabs as slab reinforcement, if required. Bar type (4) shows how the upper slab
reinforcement can be taken into the beam support and upper slab.
Concluding Notes
11 . If the supporting beam for the flight of stairs is at the ends of the landings, the entire system of
staircase and two landings can be taken as spanning between the supporting beams (see figure
below). In this case, the slab system could be considered as simply supported if there is no
continuity beyond the landings. The loading on the landing and staircase sections would be
different in a case such as this.

I
f
!
..
l )
I. '
:. l.
. I
i
. l.
. 1
~, r
r. .
. ) .
. J:
. l
I
l '
I. I
. I.
' ( .
I
. J .
'
. t.
.r
I I
L
Example 26 - Staircase (between Landings)
A typical plan area of a stair well is shown in the figure, where the landings span in a direction
perpendicular to the flight and span of the stairs. The dimensions of a single stair are as
follows:- rise = 175 mm; going= 250 mm; tread= 275 mm. The top finishes (on tread only)
are equivalent to a distributed load of 0.5 kN/mZ and the soffit plaster one of 0.25 kN/mZ. The
imposed load can be taken as 3 kN/m 2 . Using fck = 20 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa and density of
reinforced concrete= 25 kN/m 3 , design the staircase component of the system.
1.2 m 8 x 0.25 = 2.0 m 2.0m

1~
- -~-
-- - -
/.
_,l --- -
L - .. =
I
I
1.2 m
,.,
2.5 rr
-~
1.2 m
,.
"t -.:;.
Introductory Notes
1. In this example of a staircase, the landings span perpendicular to the stairs and support the
staircase, unlike in the case described in Note I I of Example 25, where the landings also span
in the direction of the staircase. . - 'I
' ,~ __ [1 1
l
2. In analysing the above system, the staircase is assumed to be supported along two edges
within the landings. Continuity over the supports can be assumed for the purpose of
span/ depth ratio calculations.
'. ? . ;' ,. ;~.::;; .,; ' . ,, ' . .. ~- - ,_

Refeh!nce ._
.alcula.t1ons . -,_'~>!
,;) ' 'C'"'
r. ,, "
.

..;,;:~ .~'. ''; .
;;,.-;,'
,,
<+.
.-
.'./
_,. "'
:::
~ ,.
.. o~.fJ.?ut
Stair SQan and waist thickness !
c I
-
Note 3 Effective span = la + (0.5) (lb,1 + lb,z)
= 2.0 + (0.5)(1.2 + 1.80)
L
= 3.5 m Effective Span
Assume a trial span/effective depth ratio of 30, for a = 3.5m I '
continuous I-way spanning staircase. ,__J'
Effective depth= (3500)/(30) = 116.67 mm

Table 4. I Assumin_g a cover of25 mm (indoor exposure XCI), and
Table 4.4N bar diameter of 12 mm, we can choose h = 150 mm and h = 150 mm
d = 150 - 25 - 12/2 = 119mm d=119mm

f
) Reference
Loading (for 1.2 m wide staircase)
I I Note 4 Factor for slope = (R2 + G2)0.S / G
= {(175)2 + (250)2}0.s; (250)
= 1.22
I Factor for overlap= T /G = (275)/(250) = 1.1
l Waist = (0.15)(1.2)(25)(1.22) = 5.49 kN/m

Steps = (1/2)(0.175)(1.2)(25)(1.1)= 2.89 kN/m
Top finishes = (0.5)(1.2)(1.1) = 0.66 kN/m
Soffit plaster= (0.25)(1.2)(1.22) = 0.37 kN/m
l Total dead load = 9.41 kN/m
Imposed load= (3.0)(1.2) = 3.60 kN/m design udl =
'. ~ J-
Design load= (1.35)(9.41) + (1.5)(3.6) = 18.1 kN/m 18.1 kN/m
Design for bending

.. I , ~
Note 5 The staircase can be idealised as follows:
rx.. 1~. l kN/m
G; RA= (18.1)(2.0)(1.9) I (3.5) = 19.65 kN

R8 = (18.1)(2.0) -19.65=16.55 kN
Mx = RA.X - w[x - 0.6]2/2
dMx = 0 when RA - w[x - 0.6] = 0
dx
i.e. x = RA/w + 0.6 = (19.65)/(18.1) + 0.6 = 1.69 m
Mmax = (19.65) (1.69) - (18.1)(1.69 - 0.6) 2 /2
l = 22.46 kNm
,(
Eq A.5 K = M/bd2fck
l K=
(22.46 x 10 6 ) /
I {(1200)(119)2(20)}
I
) Appendix A.2 = 0.066 < 0.167 ; hence singly reinforced
,
Eq A.6 z =ct [o.s + jco.zs - K/u 34)]

z= (119) [o.s + jco.zs - 0 -066/ u 34)]
l. z = 111.6 mm S (0.95)(119) = 113.1 mm
So take z = 111.6 mm
l
L
I .

EqA.9 As= M/co.87fykz)
_ 22.46 x10 6 ;
- 0.87 x 460 x 111.6
= 503 mm 2
Main steel
Hence use 5T12 (As.prov= 565 mm2)
Note 6 5 T12
7.4.2(2) As,req 503

p = bd = 1200 x 119 = 0.0035 > 0.0025 I)
p' = 0
7.4.2(2)
Po = ~ x 10- 3 = 0.0045 > p;
so use Eq 7.16.a
Table 7.4N
K = 1.5
~Po 3.2-yfck
~(Po
3
7.4.2(2)
Eq 7.16.a
d1 = K [11+1.5-yfckp+ p-1 ) /zl
3
I [ 0.0045 (0.0045 ) /2]
d= 1 5 l l + l. 5.JW 0.0035 + 3 .2.JW 0.0035 - 1
I
d= 32.7
7.4.2(2) 310 500As prov 500 X 565

Eq 7.17 - = ' = = 1.22 ::; 1.5
Gs fykAs,req 460 X 503
(~)all = 32.7 X 1.22 = 39.9 < 40

3500 Deflection O.K
( _di) = = 29.41 < 39.9; hence OK
act 119
Distribution reinforcement
f
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 ;tm btd but not less
9.2.1.1(1) yk
Table 3.1 than 0.0013btd [fc1m=2.2MPa]
Minimum reinforcement needed= 155 mm 2/m
9.3.1.1 (3) Maximum spacing of reinforcement
L
Smax,slabs = 3h :::;; 400 mm
3h = 450 mm > 400 mm . Distribution steel
So provide T10@400 mm T10@400 mm
As.prov = 196 mm 2/m > 155 mm 2/m; hence OK

f
3. The effective span is calculated based on the procedure given in Clause 3.10.1.3 ofBS8110.
The support line for the staircase is at the centre of the smaller landing but only 0.9 m into the
l wider landing, because 1.8 m is taken as the maximum distance over which the staircase load
can be assumed to be spread.
4. These factors and their use are described in Note 5 of Example 25. Also, the load evaluation
and reinforcement design is done in this example, not per unit width of the inclined slab but
for the actual staircase width of 1.2 m.
5. Although continuity is assumed over supports for span/depth ratio considerations, it will be
I safer to assume simple supports when designing for bending, as the continuity extends only
upto the edge of the landing. The loads from the landings are carried by the landings in the
direction perpendicular to the flight of the stairs; hence they are not considered in the analysis.
['"
' 6. Minimum steel and maximum spacing checks should also be carried out, as for distribution
steel later on.
Concluding Notes
7. Detailing of reinforcement can be done in a manner similar to that in Example 25.
I 8. Shear should also be checked for , as in Exampl e 25, the max imum shear force being the
greater of RA and Ra - i.e. 19.65 kN.
9. When designing the landings, in addition to their own dead and imposed loads, the loads from
the staircase - i.e. RA and Ra will be uniformly spread over the entire smaller landing and over
1.8 m of the larger landing, respectively.
l 10. Where staircase flights surrounding open wells intersect at right angles, the loads from the
common landing can be shared between the two-perpendicular spans, as described in Clause
J. 5.7.4.3 of the IStructE Manual.
IJ
l
S
1.

CHAPTER 9
Design of Wall and Corbel
Example 27 - Plain Concrete Wall

The lateral loads in the short way direction on a four storey building are taken by two end concrete
shear walls of length 15 m and height 14 m. The service wind load on one shear wall is 180 kN.
Check whether a plain concrete wall (fck = 25 MPa) of 175 mm thickness is sufficient for the
wall panel between foundation and 1st floor slab (clear height of wall = 4.0 m) if it carries the
following service loads, in addition to the wind load:- self weight= 18 kN/m; dead load from 1st
floor slab = 12 kN/m; dead load from above the 1st floor slab= 80 kN/m; imposed load from
f 1
1st floor slab= 7.5 kN/m; imposed load from above the 1st floor slab= 19 kN/m.
Introductory Notes
1. Given that even plain concrete walls require horizontal and vertical reinforcement (Clause
9.6.1 ), and if this reinforcement will be distributed on two faces (which is advisable, since
crack control reinforcement should be as close to the surface as possible) , then it is very
difficult to construct a wall under 175 mm. This is because cover requirements will be 25
mm on the inside (XCl exposure) and 35 mm on the outside (XC3 exposure) and because the
bar diameter for vertical steel should be at least 12 mm, in order to ensure sufficient stiffness
for the reinforcement cage prior to concreting.
2. Guidance on calculating wind loads is given in "EN 1991-1-4; Actions on structures: Part 1-4:
wind actions".
3. It is assumed tha!_ stability for the structure as a whole has been satisfied. 111e overturning
moment due to wind, factored by 1.5, should be less than the resisting moment due to dead
load, factored by 1.0.
Reference j
Effective height of the wall cJ
I
I I
It is tci.k:en that condition 1 exists at the bottom and
J
condition 2 at the top of the wall.
IStructE 10 = ~le = 0.8 X 4 = 3.2 m 10 = 3.2 m
Manual
(Table 5 .19) Loading
- L
Assuming wind acts at midheight of wall, wind moment= ' -, -
;...
I
-
(180) (lt!-/2) = 1260 kNm. .- ~
- \
Hence, critical wind loading = (6)(1260)/(15)2
= 33.6 kN/m
II
\'
\
.
Design of Wall and Corbel Page 128
I
I
I. Reference Calculations
-. . - - . '. .... ~
i Output
2 + (n - 2)t/J 0
I f
EN 1991-1-1
(6 ~ 3.1.2(11 ))
an=-----
n
l
i
n=4
EN 1990 t/1 0 = 0.7
..
I (Table Al .1) 2 + (4 - 2) x 0.7
an= = 0.85 an= 0.85
II 4
I EN 1990
Imposed load(Q1<) = an(7.5 + 19) = (0.85)(26.5)
= 22.5 kN
Hence, ultimate loads per unit length of wall are:-
I
I (6.3.1) Combination 1 \I
'-..)--
(TableA 1.2.B) ,-
I
F1 = 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk
(Eq 6.lOa) F1=(1.35)(18+12 + 80) + (1.5)(22._5.)I_ I
I'
I
= 182.3 kN/m
(
r. ) )
\ \
~
'
\ c1 J
Combination 2, , I
F2 = (1.35Gk 1.5Wk) or i(l_,_QOGk 1.5Wk)
F21 = (1.35)(110) + (1.5)(33.6) = 198.9 kN/m or
F22 = (1.00)(110) - (1.5}(33.6) = 59.6 kN/m I ' r
\r ~ r ,...-
r Combination 3,
,. 1:.. \ :t _I
F3 = (1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 1.5t/J 0 Wk) or

I F3 = (1.35Gk + 1.5Wk + 1.5t/J oQ1<)
EN 1990 F31 = (1.35)(110) + (1.5)(22.5)

(TableA 1.1) +(1.5)(0.6)(33.6) = 212.5 kN/m or
F32 = (1.35)(110) + (1.5)(33.6))
Note4 +(1.5)(0.7)(22.5) = 222.5 kN/m Fmax = 222.5 kN
Note: - no tension arises. /m
Classification of wall
f.. IStructE
10 z 3200
Manual
h = 175 = 18 ' 3
l
J
(5 .6.2.1)
( 1 7 - Miz)
7
Note 5 5.6 . Mzz = 5.6 X -;::::==l=.= = = = 42.2
l NEd
lOOOhfck
222.5 x 10 3
1000 x 175 x 25
lo
l Hence the wall is short.
> h = 18.3
Wall is short
f. There are no moments acting at right angles to the wall,

l
except due to its load eccentricity and misalignment.
t
Page 129
L Design of Wall and Corbel
Reference : Calculations Output
'
Note 6 "J? The first floor loading can be taken as acting at h/6 from
'
r wall centre-line; then the composite load eccentricity is
I e1=(12+7.5)(175/6)/[12+7.5+{80+19(0.9)}] = 4.88 mm
If. IStructE The eccentricity due to misalignment is given by
f,
Manual
(Table 5.16) ea = 2Silo = ( 1 )
300
(1)z
(3200) = 5.33 mm
f
(Table 3.1) e 1 +ea = 4.88 + 5.33 = 10.21 mm
Note 7
6.1(4) But minimum eccentricity = max{20 mm;

h/30 = (175/30) = 5.83 mm}
,'
= 20 mm > 10.21 mm I
I J
The moment due to eccentricity and misalignment is less
than the minimum moment that has to be designed for. So
it can be considered that the walls are not subject to
significant bending moments.
Hence ensure that I,
IStructE
Manual fth :s:; 0.43fckh + 0.67fykAsc
(5.6.4.1) (222.5 x 175) s; (0.43 x 25 x 175) + (0.67 x 460 x A5 c)
Ase ~ 120 mm 2 /m
.Minimum reinforcemenl
9.6.2(1) Asv,rnin = 0.004Ac
(SLNA) "=--co.604)(175)(1000) = 700 mm 2 /m
Note 8 Assuming 2 x T12@300 mm as vertical Vertical r/f
Note 9 reinforcement. /.~ 2T12@300 mm
Asv,prov = 753 mm /m < :Asv,rn~= 0.04Ac)
2
Maximum allowable spacing= 400 mm ( <3h) ')
9.6.2(3) > 300 mm; hence OK

Horizontal reinforcement is provided such that it is higher
9.6.3(1) than the area of half the vertical reinforcement per face.
9.6.3(2) Horizontal steel= T8@225 mm(< 400 mm) iri each face Horizontal r/f
Ash.prov = 446 mm /m (> O.OOlAc)
2 T8@225 mm
..
TB@ 225 mm
I
I
I
I
I
I
I('
.. .l
7
2 x T12 @30 mm
Plan view
Check for shear

Note 10 Design horizontal shear force= 180 kN
Min. design vertical load= (110)(15) = 1650 kN
{> 4(180)(1.5) = 1080 kN}; hence OK

r
i .
4. The l)J 0 factor for imposed loads is taken as 0.7, whereas that for wind loads as 0.6 as per
Table Al.1 of BS EN 1990. The UK National Annexe however uses a figure of 0.5 for the
latter.
J
I 5. We assume that elements other than this wall will be taking lateral loads in the direction
perpendicular to the plane of the wall. Hence the wall is braced in its weaker direction, and the
most conservative value for M 1zlM 2z is zero. See also Note 4 in Example 18.
6. The load from the first floor slab can be assumed as triangularly distributed in bearing over the
I thickness of the wall, giving rise to an eccentricity ofh/6. When calculating the overall load in
I. order to find the composite load eccentricity, the an factor on the imposed loads from above
,- :.
., the first floor level is 0.9 since only 3 suspended slabs contribute to it.
7. Si is obtained from Table 3.1 of the IStructE Manual, where the building height is taken
greater than 10 m and the number of column stabilized by bracing system is taken as 1, which
is conservative.
8. According to Clause 9.6.2(2), where the minimum reinforcement controls the design, half of
this area should be located on each face.
9. Since reinforcement to control thermal and hydration shrinkage should be fairly closely
spaced. a spacing of 300 mm should not be exceeded. A minimlU11 of 12 mm diameter is
used for vertical steel, in order to give stiffness to the reinforcement cage prior to concreting.
The horizontal reinforcement should be placed outside the vertical steel on both faces, to
ensure better crack control, as thermal and shrinkage movements will generally be in the
horizontal direction; furthermore it is easier to fix the horizontal steel on the outside.
10. Check.for shear is done based Clause 3.9.4.18. of BS 8110.
I.
i Concluding Notes
11. The wall reinforcement should also be checked for satisfying tie reinforcements . This is dealt
l
, with in Example 3 3.
--'-f-i, /p
l_ --1~/~' ....., : . I
'- I I
,. / I
II
I
I
I /1)
/; I I I 1 , .'i. ,.0
, :::J, I (
~v~ ~-\:1 I I
t ~
r /? , I '\.. ,~
/,
L
> ' .. J... ,
-e 1-:-- \l h/~)
tJ .~_

L
Example 28 - Corbel
Design a corbel that will carry a vertical ultimate load of 200 kN into a 300 mm x
300 mm column, assuming the line of action of the load to be 180 mm from the face of the
column. Take fck = 25 MPa and fyk = 460 MPa.
Introductory Notes
1. According to Clause 5 .12. 7 of the IStructE Manual corbels should be designed using strut
and tie models when 0.4hc ~ ac ::::; he or as cantilevers when ac > he, where ac is the
shear span and he is the overall depth.
2. When using a strut and tie model, the forces in the corbel should be determined by
maintaining equilibrium with the applied loads at the ultimate limit state.
I
Reference . Caleulations
Corbel dimensions
The width of the corbel can be the same as that of the
column, i.e. 300 mm.
The length of the bearing plate can also be taken as 300
mm. The width, w, will be given by
IStructE Bearing stress ::::; 0.48 ( 1 - fck) fck
Manual 250
3
(5.12 .7) 200 x 10 ( 25 )
300w ~ (0.4 8 ) 1 - 250 x 25
w ~ 61.7 mm;
hence, choose a bearing width of 80 mm. Bearing width
(Note:- ac = 180 mm is greater than 80/2 = 40 mm; 80mm
hence OK
Since the corbel has to project out from the bearing area a
distance that would accommodate a stressed bend radius, Total projection L !
choose corbel projection as 45 0 mm. 450mm
Corbel depth has to be such that maximum resistance of

IStructE the concrete compressive strut is not exceeded.
Manual Limiting (z 0 /a~) to 1 (i.e. 8 ~ 45) gives
(5.12.7) F f .J
d> Ed '. h ' - 1- ~

6.5.2(2) - 0.34v'bfck + ac, w ere v - 250
Note 3 , fck 25
v = 1 - 250 = 1 - 250 = 0 9
IStructE The horizontal load on the corbel= 0.2FEd

Manual So a~ - ac = 0.2ah (from 6. of forces at & above B)
(5.12.7) ah= 45 mm
Note4 a~ = 180 + 0.2 x 45 = 189 mm

r

3
200 x 10
276 1
d 2: 0.34 x 0.9 x 300 x 25 + 189 = mm
Limiting C;) to C;) min gives

a~
IStructE d 2: -;:::=========::::;::::===::;:=
Manual 0.68a~v'bfek {(Z 0 ) . _ (Z 2. }- (Z 2.
0 ) 0 )
I (5.12.7)
(z;) .
mm
FEd d mm
is assumed to be 0.75
d mm d mm
189
d "?. -;::==================
I o.68 x rn; ~ ~~; 300 x 25 co. 75 _ 0 .752 ) _ 0 .75 2
0 3
1 .
d 2: 377.4 mm
I h = 425 mm
Hence choose h = 425 mm
d = 425 - 35 - 20/2 = 380 mm d = 380 mm
I 0.4he = 0.4 X 425 = 170 mm; ac = 180 mm
0.4he ::::; ac ::::; he; hence designed using strut and tie
model.
Forces in Corbel
I
a'c
A.
e B
Note 5 cd z
I . c'
.... d-z ,
[. 2(d - z) cos~-- )
Force in the concrete strut

Fed = fed X Wstrut X bw
= fed x 2(d - z) x bw cos 8
Detennination of angle of strut

FEd = Fedsin8 =fed x 2(d-z) x bwcos8 sin8
[. = fed X (d - a~ tan 8)bw sin2 8
X
= fed x d X bw ( 1 - [:~]tan 8) sin2 8

Resolving horizontally at B
Frd = Fed cos 8 + HEd = FEd cos 8 /sin 8 + HEd
l Ftr1 = FEr1cot8 + 0.2FEr1

L
Reference Output
The design strength of the concrete strut must not exceed
f
O'Rd,max = 0.6v'fed; where v' = 1 - ~~ = 0.9
6.5.2(2)
2
O'Rd max = 0.6 X 0.9 X (O.S67 X 2S) = 7.6S N/mm 2
Fed= fed X Wstrut X bw
Fed= fed X 2(d-z) X bwcos8
fe:~~w = (1-[:~]tane)sin28
a~ 189
ci = 380 =a.so
r 1
FEd 200 x 10 3
0 23
feddbw = (7.6S)(380)(300) =
= (1 - O.S tan 8) sin 28 8 = S6.4
This will give 8 = S6.4
tan 8 = 1.Sl
Annex J.3(1) 1 <tan 8 < 2.S; hence OK f'
Design of Main reinforcement
Frd =Fed cos 8 + HEd = FEd cot 8 + 0.2FEd

Frd = 200(cot(S6.4) + 0.2) = 172 .9 kN
3
. _ F td _ 17 2. 9 x 10 _ m 2
2
As,mam - 0.87fyk - 0.87 x 460 - 43 m
Main bars
2
Provide 3T16 bars (As.prov = 603 mm ) . 3T16
Annex J.3(2) Horizontal links

IStructE ae = 180 mm < O.She = 212.S mm;
Manual so closed horizontal links should be provided.
2 Horizontal links
(Fig 5.35b) As.link 2:: 0.SAs,main = O.S x 432 = 216 mm
Note 6 Provide 3T10 links (As.prov = 236 mm 2 ). 3T10
Bending main reinforcement I ~
The bend in the main reinforcement should start a cover . _J
Note 7 distance (3S mm) from the bearing plate. It should end a
I -
distance of cover+ link dia. +bar dia. (3S + 10 + 16 =
61 mm) from the end of the corbel. Hence, distance
available for bend radius = 230 - 3S - 61 = 134 mm
[Distance from end of the bearing plate to the edge of the
corbel= 4SO - 180 - 40 = 230 mm]
'
Mandrel diameter, m ' min should
.
be such that -
8.3(3)
(Cl/ab)+ 1/(2)) '\
m,min ~ Fbt f -
-
ed
\ .
-
Design of Wall and Corbel r : Page 134

r
i
r
I . Reference
I
Calculations Output
I
Critical value for ab= 35 + lO(links) + 16/2
I.
,. =53mm
Stress in bars= (0.87)(460)(432/603)
= 286.7 N/mm 2
. > (286 7 x 201) (Cl/53) + 1/((2)(16)))
m,mm - (0.567)(25)
m,min ~ 204 mm
So minimum bend radius rmin = 204/2 = 102 mm
So chooser as 130 mm< 134 mm; hence OK r = 130 mm
3(}0 45D
3T16 '\'ii:;
( ,,
""'-
//------- - - -- - -------:;. ./
3T10~ ~
~
tj"
j)
r
I.
3. The term FEd/0.34v'bfck (= w, say) in fact estimates the minimum width of a notional vertical
,.
compressive strut that resists the applied force FEd (see Clause 6.5 .2(2)). If 8 = 45 the
I width of the inclined compressive strut will be .Y2w and the projection of this width on a
I
I
vertical plane will be .Y2 ..Y2w = 2w. As shown in the figure, half of this (i.e. w) will be equal
to (d-z). Separately, from the 6 of forces at & below B, we have z = ac' for 8 = 45. In this
way, we arrive at an expression ford as w + ac'.
4. The ah value is based on a cover value of 25 mm and an initial guess for main bar diameter
of 20 mm. hence ah= 35 + 20/2 = 45 mm.
f 5. This calculation procedure is obtained from "Reinforced Concrete Design-to Euro code 2,
{ 6th ed" by Mosley,B., Bungey, J. and Hulse, R.
6. Although Annexe J.3(2) specifies only 25% of the main steel as links, 50% has been used
here, as per Figure 5.35b of the IStructE Manual. If ac > a.She and FEd > VRdp then
closed vertical links should be provided according to Annex J.3(3).
7. The allowance of a cover distance from the outer edge of the bearing plate will ensure the
spreading of load fro_m the bearing plate to the level of tie steel before the bend commences.
I
l
L Design of Wall and Corbel Page 135
Concluding Notes
8. Main reinforcement should be anchored at both ends according to Annex J.3(4). It should be
anchored in the supporting element on the far face and the anchorage length should be
measured from the location of the vertical reinforcement in the near face. The reinforcement
should be anchored in the corbel and the anchorage length should be measured from the inner
face of the loading plate.
9. Since a fairly large distance is involved in accommodating the bend radius, an alternative
way of anchoring tie bars is to weld a transverse bar according to Clause 8 .5 or to provide an
anchorage device as shown in Figure 5.35(b) of the IStructE Manual. In any case, the actual
projection of the corbel beyond the bearing plate can be adjusted right at the end of the
design, and will not affect the preceding calculations.

f
i. CHAPTER I 0
I
I
j
Design of Beam for Torsion
Example 29 - Design for Torsion

A cantilever slab of clear span 2.0 m functions as a hood over a porch. Its thickness varies from
200 mm at the support to 100 mm at the free end, while it carries finishes amounting to 0.5
I.. . kN/m2 and an imposed load of 0.5 kN/m 2. It is supported by a beam 600 mm x 300 mm,
spanning 4.0 m between columns, which are considered to provide full bending and torsional
restraint. Design the beam for bending and torsion, assuming fck = 25 MPa, fyk = 460 MPa
and density of reinforced concrete= 25 kN/m 3.
Introductory Notes
1. It is instructive to classify torsion into two types. Compatibility torsion, which may arise in
I statically indeterminate situations, is generally not significant; torsional moments will be shed
l back into the elements carrying bending moments (at right angles to the element carrying
torsion), because torsional stiffnesses are lower than bending stiffnesses. Any torsional
I cracking will be controlled by shear links. However, equilibrium torsion in statically
detem1inate situations, where torsional resistance is required for static equilibrium, will have
significant magnitudes, and has to be designed for. The example above is such a case.
2. Assuming that the columns provide full bending restraint implies that they have infinite
stiffness. In practice, of course this will not be the case and the deformation of the columns
will reduce the beam fixed end moments. However, full torsional restraint has to be provided
by the columns, in order to preserve static equilibrium, where equilibrium torsion is involved.
.. !_.:
I
, (!
Reference
l
_,
~-------00
!:
J
600
2000
l
~
l. Loading on beam
IL Hood = {(0.2 + 0.1)/2}(2.0)(25) = 7.50 kN/m

Finishes = (0.5)(2.3) = 1.15 kN m
L Design of Beam for Torsion Page 137

Reference CalculatiOns
. - - ..
Output
Self weight = (0.6)(0.3)(25) = 4.50 kN/m
Total dead load = 13.15 kN /m
Imposed load = (0.5)(2.3) = 1.15 kN/m
Design load = {(1.35)(13.15) + (1.5)(1.15)}

= 19.5 kN/m bending udl =
19.S kN/m
Torsional loading
(assume shear centre is at centroid of beam section)

Hood= (7.5)(2/3)(0.15+1.0)
+ (7.5)(1/3){0.15+(2.0/3)} = 7.79 kNm/m
Finishes= (0.5)(2.0)(0.15+1.0) = 1.15 kNm/m I
I

'
Total dead load torsion = 8.94 kNm/m

Imposed load torsion= (0.5)(2.0)(0.15+1.0)
= 1.15 kNm/m
Design load = {(1.35)(8.94) + (1.5)(1.15)}
= 13.8 kNm/m torsional udl =
13.8 kNm/m
Design for bending
Table 4.1 Cover is taken as 35 mm (XC3 exposure conditions), linl

Table 4.4N diameter is 10 mm and main bar is talen as of 20 nun
diameter.
Hence d = 600 - 35 - 10 - 20/2 = 545 mm d = 545 mm
Take M = (1/12)wJ2 (built in beam; at span & support)
= (1/12)(19.5)( 4)2 = 26 kNm
Now, K = M/bct2fck I j
(26 x 10 6 ) /
Eq A.5 K= I {(300) (545) 2(25)} f
I l
:__ I
Appendix A.2 K = 0.012 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
I ,
Eq A.6 z =ct [o.5 + .J(o.25 - K/1 .134 )] I
I. f
z = (545) [o.5 + .J(o.25 - 0 -012/ 1 .134 )]

I
z = 539.2 mm$ (0.95)(545) = 517.8 mm J
So take z = 518 mm
Eq A.9 As = M/ ;co.87fykz)
_ 26x10 6 /
- . 0.87 x 460 x 518
.
= 125.4 mm 2
Design of Beam for Torsion Page 138

f .
I
[.; I
'
I< I Reference
9.2 .1.1(1)
_g:alculations
f
.-
Qu;tPu_t.
As.prov has to be greater than 0.26 fctm btd but not less
ck
). than 0.0013brd
0.26 f;rm btd = 240 mm 2 / m
yk
0.0013brd = 213 mm 2 /m
Table 3.1 ( fctm = 2.6MPa J
I
So provide minimum reinforcement= 240 mm 2 /m, 2T16
Provide 2T16 (As.prov = 402 mm 2 )
I So nominal reinforcement can be used at span.
As.prov
= 402 mm 2
Design for torsion and shear

i.
..::
~
Shearforce(VEct) = (19.5)(4)/2 = 39 kN VEd = 39 kN
r Total torsional moment= (13.8)( 4) = 55.2 kNm
Torsional restraint at each end= 55.2/2 = 27.6 kNm
The torsional moment (kNm) will vary as follows:-
r
l. 27.6
Note 3
~' 2.0m
-27.6
6.3.1(3) The rectangular section.is converted to an equivalent
Note 4 hollow box section.
Area of the section A
6.3.2(1)
tef,i = Perimeter of the section = ~
bh 600 x 300
tef,i = 2(b + h) = 2(600 + 300) = lOO mm
! 6.3 .2(1) Twice the distance between the edge and the centerline of
I
)
the longitudinal reinforcement= 2(cover +link
diameter+ bar diameter /2)
2
l J
= 2 ( 3 5 + 10 +
2
)
= 110 mm tef,i = 110 mm
Hence tef,i should be taken as 110 mm . .
Area Ak within the centerline of the equivalent hollow
[... box section.
Ak = (b - t)(h - t) = (300 - 110)(600 - 110)
Ak =
l = 93.1 x 10 3 mm 2
Perimeter of the center line
93.1 x 10 3 mm 2
Uk= 2 (b + h - 2t) = 2(300 + 600 - 2 x 110)
I l = 1360 mm Uk= 1360 mm

L
. .
Reference :-/ 6litp~! ~
6.3.2(4) TRd, max = 2VCXcwfcctAktef,i sin 8 cos 8
Eq 6.30 8 = 22
6.2.3(3) CXcw = 1
;~~)
25
6.2.3(3) v = 0.6 ( 1 - = 0.6 (1 - 2 5 0) = 0.54
Eq 6.6N TRct,max = 2(0.54)(1)(0.567 X 25) X (110)(93.lxl0- 3 )
x sin 22 cos 22 x 10- 6 TRd,max
= 54.5 kNm = 54.45 kNm
CXcwbz V1fcd
6.2.3(3) VRd,max = -(c_o_t_8_+-ta_n_8_)
Eq 6.9
z = 0.9d = (0.9) (545) = 490.5 mm
6.2.3(1) (1.0)(300)( 490.5)(0.54)(0.56 7 x 25) -3
VRct ,max = (cot22+tan22) xlO
VRd,max
= 391.2 kN = 389.2 kN
TEd VEd 27.6 39

6.3.2(4) ---+ =--+--=0.61$1; I '
Eq 6.29 TRd,max VRd,max 54.5 391.2 I
l ,
hence concrete section is adequate.

Note 5
Reinforcement required for shear resistance
Design value of shear resistance of the concrete bean1

without links
1
6.2.2(1) VRd,c = [CRct,ck(100p1fck) / 3 + k1 CJcp] bwd
Eq 6.2.a with a minimum of L
Eq 6.2 b VRd,c = ( Ymin + k1 CJcp)bwd
CJcp = Nect/Ac = 0
6.2.2(1) k = 1 + ~ = 1 + ~ = 1.61 $ 2.0

L~
As1 402
P1 = bwd = 300 x 545 = 0.0025 :::; 0.02
I
0.18 0.18
CRdc = - - = - - = 0.12 LJ
' Ye 1.5
k1 = 0.15 f 1
Vmin -- 0.035k 3/Zfck liz

3 1
= 0.035 x 1.61 /z x 25 /z
= 0.36N/mm 2
bw = 300 mm
(vmin + kiCJcp)bwd = 58.9 kN
1
VRd,c = [C0.12)(1.61)(0.25 X 25) /3 + o]
(300)(545) xl0- 3 VRd,c = 58.9 kN
- = 57.8 kN < 58.9 kN

1
6.2.1(4) VRct,c = 58.9 kN > VEct = 38.4 kN
f So throughout the beam nominal (minimw11) shear

reinforcement is required.
( 0.08/G) ( o.o8-v'25)
9.2.2(5) Pw,min = fyk = = 0.00087
460
Eq 9.5N Asw
I
'
Eq 9.4 Pw =
A
.
s. bw.sma
.
sw,mm = 0.00087 X 300 X sin 90 = 0.26
s
'. 2
j. Assume link diameter of 8 mm (Area= 50.3 mm 2 ) \
' t
2 x 50.3 c....
:'
f"
I
- - - = 0.26
s .-
\. . r
\_ ' -
..
r'
( s = 387 mm \ -. t.
9.2.2(6) s1,max = 0.75d(l +cot a) [where a= 90] "\
(
r-,-f. . -, . -
Eq 9.6N SJ,max = 0.75 X 545(1 + O) = 409 mm I ._- "-; / '\
I"l 9.2.3(3) SJ,max,tor = min[u/8 = 2(600 + 300)/8 = 225 mm; - L r. '

......,,
min{a; b} = 300 mm] Nominal torsional . . .L"" ,\ - . . . '"
So maximum spacing oflinks = 225 mm< 409 mm links i
'-
-
'- !
J
, So provide T8@225 mm. T8@225 mm . ' '
\.,I..::.:
The torsional resistance of minimum links
:>~
-.:-~
Note 6 Asw = TEd ,.. ----"-) ('' -

\,..--- ~~Ak0.87fyk cot8 .,\ \
.... _\ 50.3\X (2x93.lxl0 3 ) x 0.87 x 460 x cot 22 x 10- 6

TEd - '-.__../ 225
.l TEct,nom = 41.2 kNm; > 27.6 kNm;
' Hence nominal links are sufficient for entire span. Nominal links ow'
) ~"' ll ,/J "- 1,"-~,_.~

Additional total longitudinal reinforcement.~, '- / I /. t '
x~iH
_ ~
\ 1j .
l:As1fyct _ TEct . r ~ ,_"'J
6.3.2(3)
Uk
- 2A k cot 8 \ -
l; J ~
Eq 6.28
l
J A51 =
27.6 x 10 6 x 1360
cot 22
\l\ ' . J.._ < -" I
j - ~< r , f/
,req 2 X 93 .1 X 10 3 X 0.87 X 460 . -- '-- . '"':>
= 1247 mm 2 - --. ~-
) '-
' Total longitudinal r/f = As,req + Asl,req = 240 + 124 7 4T20 (corners)
Note 7 = 1487 mm 2 and 2T12
9.2.3(4)
Hence use 4T20 + 2T12(1482 mm 2 ) (1482 mm 2 )
l
L Design of Beam for Torsion Page 141
3. The torsional moment variation in beams, whether for a distributed moment such as this or for a
point moment, is geometrically identical to the shear force variation corresponding to
distributed or point loads respectively.
4. According to Clause 6.3.1(3), the torsional resistance of a section may be calculated on the
basis of a thin walled closed section, in which equilibrium is satisfied by a closed shear flow.
Solid sections may be modeled by equivalent thin-walled sections.
5. The maximum resistance of a member subjected to torsion and shear is limited by the capacity
of the concrete struts. This check is done to check the combined effects of torsion and shear.
6. The equation to find the torsional resistance is obtained from "Reinforced Concrete Design to
Eurocode 2, 6th edition" by Mosley, B., Bungey, J., and Hulse, R. In this equation, Asw refers
to the area of a single leg of the links and not both (as for shear reinforcement.
7. The longitudinal bars should be arranged such that there is at least one bar at each comer (the
20 mm bars in this case), the others being distributed uniformly around the periphery of the
links, with spacing no greater than 350 mm (i.e. the 2T12 bars at mid height of the
section)- see Clause 9.2.3(4). Strictly speaking the maximum spacing for flexural steel : I
should also be checked at the top and bottom faces; however, this will not be so critical,
as only minimum steel is required for flexure.
Concluding Notes
8. A single value of 8 should be used throughout the calculations. In general, using the lower
limit of 22 (as we have done) will be conservative for finding the shear capacity of the
concrete and the required areas of shear and torsion reinforcement; however, it will also yield a
higher value for shear or torsional capacity for a given amount ofreinforcement (e.g. nominal
reinforcement).
9. The links provided for torsion have to be of the closed type as specified in Clause 9.2.3(1 ),
whereas even open links are permissible for shear links (Clause 9.2.2(2)).
IO .According to Clause 6.3.1(3), complex shapes such as T sections, may be divided into a series
of sub sections, each of which is modeled as an equivalent thin-walled section, and the total
resistance taken as the sum of the capacities of individual elements.
I 1

I CHAPTER 11
r
1 Frame Analysis and Moment Redistribution
I
Example 30 - Frame Analysis for Vertical Loads

l
I
A typical internal braced transverse frame for a multi-storey office building is shown below. The
frames are located at 5 m centres and the length of the building is 40 m. The cross sectional
I. dimensions of members are as follows.
(i) Slab thickness (roof and floors) - 150 mm
~ :: (ii) Beams (roof and floors) - 600 mm x 300 mm
r (iii)Cohunns (for all floors) - 300 mm x 300 mm
The vertical loading is as follows:-

(i) Load corresponding to finishes= 0.5 kN/m 2 (for roof and floors)
(ii) Load corresponding to light partitions= 1.0 kN/mZ (for floors only)
! (iii) Imposed load on roof= 1.5 kN/m2
1 (iv)Imposed load on floors= 2.5 kN/m2
(v) Density ofreinforced concrete= 25 kN/m3
Obtain the design ultimate moments and shear forces from vertical loads for the beam ABC at the
first floor level.
Roof
4.0 m
2nd Floor
).
4.0 m
B c
J: I st Floor
! 6.0 m 6.0m
Ground Level
Footing Level
l
Introductory Notes
l I. The next 4 examples (including this one) deal with the entire structure, as opposed to
structural elements.
r 2. The partitions and imposed loads are taken from Clause 6.3.1 of EN 1991-1-1: 2: 2002.
Action on structures - Part 1-1: General actions - Densities, self weight, imposed loads for
buildings.
l"
L Frame Analysis and Moment Redistribution Page 143
3. Most frames are braced, the lateral load being taken by masonry infills or lift/stair wells. Since
the frame is braced, it is possible to use either a beam level sub-frame analysis or a continuous
beam analysis. Since the latter over-estimates moments considerably, the former will be used.
I o
- ;. _,,_ .
Reference Calculations -~ Output . .
'. . .... - - - . '.- ; . .... .
~ . . !-
.
'
.
Stiffnesses
(I/L) of columns above I st floor =

(1/12)(300) 4 / ( 4000) = 0.169 x 10 6 mm 3
(I/L) of columns below I st floor=
(1/12)(300) 4 / (5000) = 0.135 x 10 6 mm 3
Flanged beam action will prevail in the beam.s, and
IStructE
Manual
(Table 5.9)
Note4
br corresponding to end spans is
br = bw + 0.170 I
=
= 0.3 + (0.17)(6.0)
1.32 m
150
450
l ,~
1320
LJ.---
I bf= 1320 mm
~
300
I ofbean1 section =9.874 x 10 9 mm 4
(VL) of beams = (9.874 x 10 9 ) /(6000)
= 1.646 x 10 6 mm 3
Distribution factors
Only the beam factors will be considered.

DAs =Des= 1.646/(1.646 + 0.169 + 0.135) = 0.84
DsA= Dsc= 1.646/{(1.646)(2) + 0.169 + 0.135} = 0.46
Loading on beam
Slab = (5)(0.15)(25) = 18.75 kN/m

Beam = (0.45)(0.3)(25) = 3.38 kN/m
Finishes = (0.5) (5) = 2.5 kNlm gk= 24.63 kN/m
Total dead load = 24.63 kN/m
Imposed load (floor) = (5) (2.5) = 12.5 kN /m

Partitions = (5)(1.0) - 5.0 kN Im
Total imposed load = 17.5 kN Im
Since a beam span carries 30 rh 2 of floor area, L
EN 1991-1-1 5 A0
aA = 74'0 +A:::; 1.0
(6.3 .1.2(10))
5 10
aA = - ;i< 0.7 + -30 = 0.833('.S 1.0) ~ 0.6; hence OK
7 qk = 14.6 kN/m
Reduced imposed load= 0.833 x 17.5 = 14.6 kN/m
Frame Analysis and Moment Redistribution Page 144

1
I .
- . .
-
I.
!
1.
I
Referenc~ . Qutput
Load arrangements
(Arrangement 1)
/.35gk + 1.5qk = 55.1 kN/m
I
f
I (Arrangement 2) -~ /
I
,,, ,. I
() ".:. ~ .t:..
, ../ r ( ).( \
5.1.3.1 (,-.. . c
55.1 kN/m l.Og0 = 24.63 kN/m
)
',- L '
~ .
...
.. A B C C,/
( '.. -"-""'
I- i {-- .
f' ' "
,~
( ) -
Arrangement 3 will be the mirror image, about B, of ' -- ' ('
Arrangement 2. 1'
/' ,-
I.
I .
Moment distribution (k.Nm)
!
(Arrangement 1)
) Note 5 0.84 0.46 0.46 0.84
AB BA BC CB
l. -165.3 +165.3 -165.3 + 165.3 Arrangement 1
Note 6 +138.8 --. + 69.4 -69.4 ~-138.8 Support moment
-26.5 + 234.7 -234.7 +26.5 at B = 234.7 kNm
!
(Arrangement 2)
0.84 0.46 0.46 0.84

AB BA BC CB
. l. -165.3 +165.3 -73.9 +73.9
-
-21.0 - -42.0 -42.0 ~ -21.0
I
156.4 +78.2 -22.2 ~ -44.4 ..

-12.9 - -25.8 -25.8 ~ -12.9
!. 10.8 ---
+5.9 +5.9 ~ +10.8
Arrangement 2
r -2.7
2.d
-0.5
-32.9
--
-5.4
+1.1
-1.0
+176.3
-5.4
+1.1
-1.0
-163.3
~
~
___.,
-2.7
2.d
-0.5
5.5
Support moment
at B = 176.3 kNm
& 163.3 kNm
!. Note 7
.
l
L
Shear forces {kN)
The shear forces RA, Rs 1, Rs2 and Re can be foill1d from

the following figures:-
MA W1 Ma1
1~
RA Ra1
Rs1 Rsz Re ,'
Arrangement 1 130.6 200.0 200.0 130.6

Arrangement 2 141.4 189.2 100.2 47.6
I ,
Span moments (kNm)
~ w
Free bending moment is given ~
Note 8 By= -(w.l.x)/2 + (w.x 2 )/2j j
I
Fixed end moment variation is Ml M
Given by M1 + (M 1 - M 2 )x/l E-------.i5.

14
_,
I 1
Hence points of contra flexure and the points and values

of max. span moments can be obtained.
Span AB Span BC
Arrangement 1
Points of L ~
contra flexure 0.21m,4.53 m 7.47 m, 11.79 m Span moments:-

(From A) I l
Max. sagging 128.3 kNm 128.3 kNm Auangement 1 l. J
Moment (2.37 m) (9.63 m) 128.3 kNm

(both spans) l
Arrangement 2
Points of
contra flexure 0.25 m, 4.89m 8.25 m, 11.88 m
(From A) Arrangement 2
Max. sagging 148.5 kNm 40.5 kNm 148.5 kNm and
Note 9 Moment (2.57 m) (10.07 m) 40.5 kNm

1
Reference
234.7
f.
32.9
26.5
''
' '' '
'
128.3
148.5
Bending moment Diagram (kNm)
.. ).
.,
'1 ....~
141.4
r Note 10
200.0
1 ' '
200.0
I. Shear Force Diagram (kN)
130.6
I 4. Since the slab will act together with the beam in frame action, some flanged beam action must
be accounted for in calculating the beam stiffness. The effective width used here is however
l less than that used for section design (see Example 8). Also, since concrete cross sections are
designed to accommodate even "unforeseen" redistribution by limiting the x/d value (see
Example 1), differing assumptions regarding element stiffnesses can be tolerated in the
r..
l.
analysis.
J
5. The distribution factors have accounted for the column stiffness, but the column moments
have been left out of the calculations for convenience, as we are interested only in the beam
moments. Since the remote ends of the columns are assumed to be fixed, there will be no carry
over moments from them to the beam-column joints. The sign convention adopted is that
clockwise moments are positive and anticlockwise moments negative.
6. In this symmetrical loading arrangement, the calculation is complete with just one joint
release.
7. The difference between the moments MsA and M8 c arises out of the fact that the columns take
l J
part of the moment arising out of asymmetrical loading.
8. The sign convention adopted in this part of the solution is that sagging moments are negative
I. and hogging moments positive.
Page 147
L Frame Analysis and Moment Redistribution
9. This two-span frame is typical of most situations, where the maximum support moments are
obtained when all spans or adjacent spans are loaded with the maximum design ultimate loads
(1.35gk + l.Sqk); and the maximum span moments are obtained when that span is loaded
with the maximum design ultimate load (l.35gk + l.Sq1<) while the adjacent spans are loaded
with the minimum design ultimate load (1.0 g1<).
10. The diagrams for Load Arrangement 3 have not been shown, for the sake of clarity, since they
will be mirror images of those for Load Arrangement 2 about B.
Concluding Notes
r
11. The beam moments could have been obtained using a continuous beam analysis, instead of a I
subframe analysis (Clause 3.2.1.2.4 of BSB110) as pointed out in Note 3. However, column l j
moments will then have to be estimated separately, as indicated in Clause 3.2.1.2.5 of

BS8110.
12. If there are 3 or more approximately equal bays in the frame and the characteristic imposed
load does not exceed the characteristic dead load, the beam moments and shear forces can be
obtained from Table 5.12 of the IStructE Manual, for a continuous beam analysis (Clause
5.4.3 of the IStructE Manual).
- --- ' l
l.D
I
'- -'
,_
-. I
,- ' -
I

I
j Example 31 - Frame Analysis for Horizontal Loads
I
If the office building described in Example 30 was unbraced and located in an area where the
basic wind force is 45 kN, determine the moments and shear forces induced in a typical internal
frame due to the wind load.
Introductory Notes
1. The wind forces can be determined using "Euro code 1: Actions on structures - Part 1-4:
General actions: wind actions".
I 2. In carrying out the analysis, the entire structure is analysed, assuming that only the wind load
~,_. ;. r acts on it and that points of contra flexure are developed at the centres of all beams and
columns (Clause 3 .2.1.3 .2 of BS8 l 10). A further assumption is made regarding the
distribution either of shear forces or of axial loads in columns (see Note 3 below). Thus the
I
.. I analysis for the lateral loads is performed on a statically determinate structure, and not an
indeterminate one as in the case of vertical load analysis.
I
(
Reference Cafoulations
.-. ' .. , ,. _ ''. "" '' - Ou_tput
Analysis
J
The following assumptions are made:-
1. The wind force is applied at floor and roof levels,
l
J
the force at each level being proportional to the
areas shared by them.
2. Points of contra flexure are assumed at the centres of the
I;
Note 3
beams and columns.
3. The vertical column stresses are proportional to their
distances from the centroid of the columns.
.:
l
The forces at roof, 2nd floor and 1st floor levels are
]. (2/12.25)( 45) = 7.35 kN (roof)
Note 4
J {(2+2)/12.25}(45) = 14.7 kN (2nd floor) and
/
I
{(2+2.50)/12.25}( 45) = 16.5 kN (1st floor) .
j" ...
..
(
j.. \'.I \:.. - ~
6.0m 6.0m \ ....

I.. ~1- ~1 , I
_.
r
\.1_.
!
! - -- Note 5
~
7.35
>----~----1 >---~ - -
Roof
2.0m (
\ t' 1
I ,_ -
J '-
l
) ~ 1.84 ~r.- 3.67 *~ 1.84

- ,,
1.225 0 1.225
l:
. f. f c- . . . . ".:..,O ~--- ~
,--.r: ~ ~: :_. .-;:....
Reference Jw
"' - Cakulationi =.
' ' - .'"-- ,~ < . ~, ....,, _. ;
1 25
3.67 1.84
1.84
2.0 m
~>------' 2nd flr
14.7
2.0m
5.51 11.03 5.51
6.125 0 6.125 ',

I
I
6 125 6.125
11.03 5.51
5.51
2.0m
~1-----1 1st flr
16.5
2.5 m
Note 6 9.64 19.27 9.64
17.83 0 17.83
Moments and shear forces in ABC
The moments in ABC can be found as those required to

Note 7 balance the column moments. _I
35.1 L
A c I I
-Moment at A,B
and C is !l
35.1 35.1 kNm
The shear forces in the span are obtained by dividing the

Shear force in
moment by half the span length.
AB and BC is
Hence, shear force= (35.1)/(3.0) = 11.7 kN
11.7 kN .

f
.I I .
I .
.,
1.
J. If the column sizes are unifonn, the vertical forces will be proportional to the distances of the
I
i
r
columns from the centroid of the column group. An alternative assumption to this is to
I
I
consider that the horizontal shear forces in the columns are proportional to the bay sizes.
4. Here, the total height of the frame above ground is (4.25 + 4.0 + 4.0 =) 12.25 m. The
proportion of wind load taken at each beam level is the ratio between the height of frame
between points of contraflexure corresponding to each beam level and this total height. For
taller buildings, higher floors will be subjected to proportionately greater wind forces.
5. The analysis is essentially a subframe analysis, but the entire frame has to analysed stepwise,
from the top to bottom. At each step, the vertical column reactions are obtained first, taking
moments for the equilibrium of the entire sub structure, together with the third assumption,
',.
'. .:. r. also referred to in Note 3 above. The horizontal shear forces in the colurrms can be found by
taking moments about the points of contraflexure in the beams, for the equilibrium of different
parts of the sub-structure. The results obtained from each sub-structure have to be used for
analysing the next lower sub structure.
}
6. If the column bases are not designed to resist moments, the point of contraflexure on the
lowest column should be moved down to the level of the base (as opposed to being at colurrm
mid height).
7. In order to meet stability requirements, the lateral load at each level should be at least 1.5% of
the characte1istic dead load at each level (Clause 3.1.4.2 of BS81l0). Since the total dead load
on a beam (Exan1ple 30) is (24.63)(12) = 296 kN and 1.5% of this is 4.44 kN( <
7.35 kN), the above condition is met.
Concluding Notes
8. For unbraced frames having three or more approximately equal bays, the combined effect of
I wind and vertical loads can be obtained by superposing the results of an analysis such as the
l: one above with those of a subframe analysis such as the one in Example 30, after factoring the
J
.. loads appropriately (Clause 3.2.1.3.2 ofBS8110) .
I
;
9. For very slender structures, the overall stability of the structure against overturning due to
lateral wind loads should also be checked. The appropriate load combination would be 1.4 Wk
!. (causing the overturning moment) and 1.0 Gk (providing the restoring moment).
J
I
~.
I
l
' 1
Example 32 - Redistribution of Moments

Determine the design ultimate moments for the beam ABC in Example 30, after carrying out
moment redistribution.
Introductory Notes
1. Although the design of reinforced concrete sections is carried out using the plastic capacity of
the section, the analysis of structures is still performed using elastic methods. The advantage
to the designer arising out of the above plasticity is incorporated in the analysis by moment
redistribution.
r '
2. Moment redistribution has to be performed separately for each load arrangement. In addition, I
the redistributed envelope is not allowed to fall below the 70% elastic moments envelope, to I )
ensure that wide cracks at the serviceability state will not develop (see Clause 5.3.3 of the
IStructE Manual).
( \
I
i '
Support moments
Exan1ple 30 The numerically largest elastic moment is 236.4 kNm at

IStructE support B (Arrangement 1). This can be reduced to support moment
Manual (0.7)(234.7) = 164.3 kNm for all load cases, leaving the at B = 164.3
(5.3.3) support moments at A and C (and also the column kNm
Note 3 moments) unchanged.
Note4
Hence, the support moments will be given by
Il
IJ
AB BA BC CB
I
I
Arrangement I -26.5 +164.3 -164.3 +26.5 (_
Note 5 Arrangement 2 -32.9 +164,3 -163.3 +5.5
f \
Note:- The shear forces can be found by analysing L_J

-
the sections AB and CB, as in Example 30.
r II
LJ
Span moments
Example 30 These can be found by superimposing the free bending

moment diagrams on the above fixed end moment
variation,

" - -. --' ..,. - ~
Arrangement 1
Points of
contra flexure 0.19 m, 4.97 m 7.03 m, 11.81 m span moments:- .
(from A)
I Arrangement 1
Max. sagging 157.3 kNm at 157.3 kNm at 157.3 kNm (both
moment 2.58 m 9.42 m spans)
f
Arrangement 2
l.. Points of
contraflexure 0.24 m, 4. 96 m 8.25 m, 11.88 m Arrangement 2
(from A) 153.7 kNm
~::~ 1 (span AB)
Max. sagging 153.7 kNm at 40.5 kNm at 40.5 kNm
moment 2.60 m 10.07 m (span BC)
I
3. The support moments are reduced as much as possible so that congestion of reinforcement at
beam-column junctions can be minimized. The rn a-ximurn amount ofredistribution allowed is
30% - a figure which can be accommodated by rotation at a section after plastic hinge
formation by the appropriate restriction of the x/d ratio (see Clause 5.5(4) and the SLNA).
4. In general, the x/ d ratios in columns are larger than those required to permit plastic hinge
formation. Hence, column elastic moments should never be redistributed.
I
I 5. In Arrangement 2, the support moment BA is made equal to 164.3 kNm for BA (the value
obtained after 30% redistribution in Arrangement I); but for BC it is kept at the lower value
I of 163.3 kNm obtained from elastic analysis in Example 30 - i.e. upward redistribution in the
"unloaded" span is not encouraged (see Fig. 5.11 of the IStructE Manual).
I Concluding Notes
I 6. Compared with the elastic design moments in Example 30, the redistributed design moments
are such that the support moment at B is considerably lower, while the span moments are only
slightly higher; hence the advantage in carrying out m'oment redistribution - the total moment
I
l
field is considerably reduced .
7. The points of contraflexure are generally closer to the supports for the redistributed bending
I. moment diagrams than for the elastic bending moment diagrams. In order to prevent
serviceability state cracking on the top surface, the restriction on the redistributed moment
envelope specified in Note 2 above has to be applied.
l
CHAPTER 12
Design for Stability
Example 33 - Design for Stability

The figure shows the plan of a 6 storey framed structure, where the floor to ceiling height of each
storey is 3.5 m. The average dead and imposed loads per unit area of floor can be taken as 5
kN/m 2 each. Design the stability ties for this structure with steel of fyk = 460 MPa.
' I
Column
6.0m
r , I
,I
4 x 5.0 m = 20 m
Introductory Notes
1. In order to ensure the robustness of a structure, it should nomrnll y be cmmected together by a

system of continuous ties. This example demonstrates the design of these ties.
I.
2. In addition, the structure should be capable of withstanding a notional horizontal load, which
is proportional to its characteristic dead load (see Example 31 , Note 7).
3. In calculating the amount of reinforcement required, the steel can be assumed to act at its
characteristic value - i.e. Ys = 1.0 (Clause 9.10.1.4). Furthermore, reinforcement designed for
other purposes can be used as ties (Clause 9.10.1.5). . .
i .
. -- w:..~.:- ' ., ~ . :.., :._.:vi . .
Refer~nce , Output~:- .. -"

.J
! ,_ .c
9.10.2.5 Vertical ties
These are required, since no . of storeys> 5.

Area corresponding to a typical column=
(1/2)(6.0)(5.0) = 15.0 mZ
IStructE Max. design ultimate load =

Manual (15.0){(1.35)(5.0) + (1.5)(5.0)} = 213.8 kN
(5 .11.2) Area of ties required= (213 .8 x103)/(460)
= 465 mm 2 vertical ties
This can easily be met by continuous column r/f. As= 465 mm 2
Design for Stability Page 154

r
Reference
Peripheral ties
9.10.2.2
lStrnctE
Manual Fr= 20 + 4n
= 2 0 + ( 4) ( 6) = 44 kN < 60 kN
(5.11.2) peripheral ties
Area of ties required = ( 44 x 10 3 )/( 460) = mm2
SLNA As= 96 mm 2
This can be easily met by peripheral beam r/fthat is
. I. continuous.
9.10.2.3 Internal ties - longitudinal direction

/
,ll..,7
SLNA Ir= 5.0 m (/\
Frie,int = [(gk + qk)/~Or /5)Fr
= [(5 + 5) /7.5] (5 /5) x 44
I = 59 kN/m {> (1.0)(44) = 44 kN/m}
Total Force= (59)(6.0) = 354 kN longitudinal
Area of ties required= (354 x 10 3 )/(460) internal ties
1 = 770 mm 2 As= 770 mm 2
If carried in the two peripheral beams, area required per
beam= (770)/2 = 335 mmz
I Note:- spacing of ties= 6.0 m < (1.5)(5.0)= 7.5 m
I 9.10.2.3 Internal ties - transverse direction
Ir= 6.0 m
I SLNA
Force I unit width= {(5+5)/(7.5)}(6/5)( 44)
= 70.4 kN/m { > (1.0)(44) = 44 kN/m}
I...
Total force = (70.4)(20) = 1408 kN
Area of ties required= (1408 x 10 3 )/( 460)
transverse
internal ties
= 3061 mm 2 As= 3061 mm2
I.
I
If distributed in the 5 transverse beams, area required per
beam= (3061)/5 = 612 mm2
Note:- spacing ofties = 5.0 m < (1.5)(6.0) = 9.0 m
f
Peripheral beams
r
I
' Note 4
Total tie area per beam in longitudinal direction=
peripheral beams
(tie r/f)
96+ 335 = 431 mm2 longitudinal-
Total tie area per beam in transverse direction = 431 mm 2
96 + 612 = 708 mm2 transverse -
708 mm 2

L
Reference Calculatfons Output
9.10.2.4(2) , Column ties

'
SLNA Force= greater of (3/100)(213.8)(6) = 38.5 kN

and lesser of (2.0) ( 44) = 88 kN
Note 5 and {(3.5)/(2.5)}( 44) = 61.6 kN
= 61.6 kN
x
Area of ties required = (61.6 10 3 )/( 460) = 134mm2 column ties
Since this is less than the ties in the beams, part of the
As= 134 mm2
latter can be taken into the columns.
Notes on Calculations ( .
4. Although the beam reinforcement may be greater than these tie areas required, it must be I J
ensured that continuity of tie reinforcement is provided - this has to be borne in mind when
I l
curtailing beam reinforcement.
5. The 3% load is taken for six storeys, since there will be five floor slabs and the roof above the
level of the first floor column tie; using the floor loading for the roof as well is a conservative
approximation.
Concluding Notes
6. The overall layout of the structure should also be designed to provide robustness, and key
elements (having an excessive tributary area or percentage load of a floor) should preferably
be avoided.
I
l.,
( '
I
.J

r
'-.
' CHAPTER 13
:. :
[..
.. .
I
1. .. Serviceability Limit State Calculations
I
Example 34 - Crack Width Calculation

The figure shows the cross section of a simply supported beam of 7 m span, supporting dead and
imposed loads of 20 kN/m, each. Determine the critical crack widths. The age ofloading can be
taken as 14 days.
:.,'. { .
'
fck = 25 MPa
690
750
fyk = 460 MPa
3T25
I
- ::.~ ~ Es = 20 x 10 6 MPa
I
1<111 ~I
1. 450
r (All dimensions in mm)

)
Introductory Notes
--..
~.J 1. This crack width calculation can be performed when the bar spacing rules are not satisfied, to
see whether this more accurate method will satisfy the crack width requirements in Clause
7.3 .1 (5). It can also be used to estimate the actual crack width in a flexural element.
Reference ()utput
Sectional data
Note 2 M,Q? =(20+0.3x20)(7)Z / 8 = 159.3 kNm MQP = 159.3 kNm
- ....._____ ..../J
Table 3.1 Ecm = 31 GPa

1. . , Figure 3.1 (b) G "i
ln - 2 . 2.
I
(oo,to) -
lj . \
[age of loading is taken as 14 days; h 0 = 2Ac/U
= 2 x 750 x 450/2(750 + 450) = 281, Cement CEM
Class N and RH=80%]
- Ecm,eff
E 31
,\,
Eq 7.20 ; 0eff = l + C:;to) = l + 2.2 = 9.69 GPa = 9.69 GPa
Determination of neutral axis

Es 200
Note 3 ae,eff = = - - = 20.64
Ecm eff 9.69
L Serviceability Limit State Calculations Page 157

Reference CalculatiOns oiitiJut
Reinforcement provided= 3T25 (As,prov = 1473 mm 2 )
1473
p = 450 x 690 = 0 0047
Note4 ~ = ae,effP r1 ,
+
2
ae,effP
- 1]
x =. 20.64 x
d 0.0047 x r\ r -----2
1 + 20.64 x 0.0047 - 1
1
x
d= 0.354
.. ..
.
~ .,
..,,
.. ...._. -
-- .;..__ _ - l
~ -::
x = 244.3 mm x = 244.3 mm .
r' Lever arm (z) =:= d - (x/3)

.-(- ...'
I
I
I --- ='b-g-o-~ 44.3/3) = 608.6 mm
-.."' . .
" '\-
... I . j~
= ~ = 159.3 x 10 = 77 7
..... "". 6
m2
O's zAs 608.6 X 1473 l N/m <Js I.
= 177.7 N/mm 2 \
Es 200 r.
7.3.4(2) ae =- = - = 6.45
Ecm 31
Note 5
f ct,eff (
k t-p- )
O"s- l+aePp, e ff cr
7.3.4(2) Esm - Ecm = p,eff >_ 0.6 ~
Es Es
Eq 7.9
7.3.2(2) fct eff = fctm = 2.6 MPa
Table3.l (-l(eff= min {2.5(h- d) = 2.5(750 - 690) = 150 mm; -( \c. r .
7.3.2(3) '--' ~ (h - x)/3 = (750 - 244.3)/3 = 168.6 mm; It'"
L\
I ,-
, , - ) '--, , . <'; ~.-h/2 = 750/2 = 375 mm } = 1 5 0 mm
~~
\1 L
'- '
\ '- - '
\ \ L \ t l I
. -. - ;
). ,[- - I
I
.
v \I A 14 7 3 ./\ ' ( f- .(__

7.3.4(2) Pp,eff r-A~~ 450 x 150 = 0.O 2l 8 ______
s I ;\.' -
t-
\ '
Eq 7.10
kt ~.eff
= 0.4 ----
for Jong ~-----
term loading
x 0.~2 18 (1 + 6.45 x 0.0218)

6
177.7 - 0.4
7.3.4(2) Esm - Ecm = 200 X 103
Eq 7.9 = 0.00062
0"5 177.7
0.6 Es = 0.6 x x = 0.00053 < 0.00062 Esm - Ecm
200 103 = 0.00062 ,.
Calculation of maximum crack spacing
7.3.4(3) c = (750 - 690) - (25/2) = 47.5 mm

5(c+ /2) = 5 x (47.5 + 25/2) = 300 mm
Serviceability Limit State Calculations Page 158

~
Reference - . Cakulatio~s:
Spacing between bar centres
= ( 450 - 47.5 x 2 - 25)/2
= 165 mm< 300 mm
7.3.4(3)
Eq 7.11
k 1 = 0.8; k 2 = 0.5 for bending --.
7.4.3(3)
k3 = 3.4; k4 = 0.425
Sr.max = 3.4 X 47.5 + 0.8 X 0.5 X 0.425 X 25/0.0218

7.3.4(3)
i...::.
l. = 356.5 mm Sr.max
= 356.5 mm
.' 1'? Calculation of crack width
wk = Sr,maxCEsm - Ecm)
7.3.4(1)
=356.5 x 0.00062 = 0.22 mm wk= 0.22 mm
Eq 7.8
Table 7.lN Allowable crack width = 0.3 mm > 0.22 mm;
hence satisfactory
Comparison with bar spacing rules
Spacing between bars= {450 - (2)(47 .5) - (3)(25)} / 2

= 140 mm
Stress in steel = 177 .4 N/mm 2
Allowable clear spacing= 278 mm > 140 mm; Maximum spacing
!. Table 7.3N
hence OK OK
2. The quasi-pennanent combination of Gk + 0.3Qk is normally used for long-term effects and
the appearance ofthe structure according to Clause 6.5.3(2c) of EN 1900:2002 (E).
3. The neutral axis is found based on the effective (creep modified) modulus ( ae,crp) ratio, i.e.
the ratio of the modulus of elasticity of steel (E 5 ) to the creep modulus of elasticity of
concrete (Ecm,eff).
4. The serviceability calculations are based on a triangular stress block for concrete only above
the neutral axis - i.e. a cracked section. There is no restriction on the x / d ratio, as in ultimate
limit state calculations. Instead of using this formula for x/d, we could have found the value
of x by equating the first moments of area of a transformed (cracked) section about the
neutral axis; the area of steel can be converted to an equivalent concrete area based on ae,eff
We then have <- 1
/
{b.x. (x/2) }/ae,; ff = A5 (d - x)

i .- - -,.-c ;)
----
. I

L
5. Although the neutral axis is found on the basis of the effective creep modified modulus
ratio ( ae,crp), the tension stiffening behaviour of concrete is accounted for by using the elastic
modulus ratio (ae)
Concluding Notes
6. The calculated crack widths are below 0.3 mm and hence satisfactory (Table 7. lN). This
could have been expected, because the maximum spacing is satisfied as well. It is these
simplified methods (Clause 7.3.3) that are used in everyday design, because of their
convenience.
7. For beams of overall depth exceeding 1000 mm, where the main reinforcement is
concentrated in only a small proportion of depth, additional skin reinforcement should be
provided to control cracking on the side faces of the beam. This reinforcement should be
evenly distributed between the level of the tension steel and the neutral axis and should be
located within the links (Clause 7.3.3(3)) . .

Example 35 - Deflection Calculation
The figure shows the cross section of a simply supported beam of 7 m span. If the dead and
) imposed loads are both taken as 5 kN/m 2 each, calculate the total long term deflection of the
beam at midspan. The age of loading is only 4 days.
I
fck = 25MPa
I 375
320
fyk = 460MPa
J. 2T25
--------- -- -
r
1111 11>1
225
! Introductory Notes
1. This deflection calculation can be performed when the span/effective depth ratio check fails,
I to see whether this more accurate method will satisfy the deflection requirements, e.g. in
Clause 7.4.1 (4). It can also be used to estimate the actual deflection of a flexural element.
!. 2. The age of loading is when the form work is removed, at which point much of the dead load
and some imposed construction loads will be acting on the concrete elemenls.
ll .
Reference-
Initial assessment of span/depth ratio
MuL = (5)(1.35 + 1.5)(7) 2 / 8 = 87.3 kNm MuL = 87.3 kNm
.,
[.
Eq A.5 K = M/bd2fck
_ (87.3 x 10 6 ) /
lJ ' I {(225)(320) 2 (25)}
Appendix A.2 = 0.152 < 0.167; hence singly reinforced
j
. Eq A.6 z = d [ 0.5 + j (0.25 - Kj1.134)]
! z = (320) [o.5 + j(o.25 _ 0.l5 2/i. 134)]
z = 269 mm s; (0.95)(320) = 304 mm
I"
J
So take z = 269 mm
Eq A.9 As,req . = M/ (0.87fykz)
6
l- = 87 3 xlo I o.87 x 460 x 269

Reference ' _.,. ,
As,req = 811 mm 2 As,req

= 811 mm 2
As,req 811
7.4.2(2)
p = ~ = 225 x 320 = 0 0113
p' = 0
Po = ~ x 10- 3 = 0.005
P >Po; So use Eq 7.16.b
Table 7.4 (N) K = 1.0
Eq 7.16.b -dI = K [ 11+1.5~--+-~

Po 1
p - p' 12
-
Po
,'] r
I [ 0.005 ]
d= 1.0 11 + l.5.J25 O.Oll + 0
3
I
d= 14.32
7.4.2(2) 310 500A 5 prov 500 x 982

- = ' = 460 X 811 = 132 <- 15
fyk As,req
(~) = 14.32 x 1.32 = 18.90

all
(dI) act
7000
= 320 = 21.88 $ 18.90;
span/ effective
hence span/effective depth ratio is violated. depth violated
Data for quasi permanent combination
Note 3 MQP = (1 x 5 + 0.3 x 5)(7) 2 I 8

= 39.8 kNm MQP = 39.8 kNm
L,
Table 3.1 Ecm = 31 GPa Ecm = 31 GPa
Figure 3.1(b) cp( oo, t 0 ) = 2.8
[age of loading is taken as 4 days; h 0 = 2Ac/U
= 2 x 375 x 225/2(375 + 225) = 140.6,
L..-
Cement CEM Class N and RH = 80%]
Ecm 31
7.4.3(5) Ec,eff =l + cp( oo, to) = l + 2 .8 = 8.16 GPa Ee eff = 8.16 GPa
Eq 7.20
.. . .
, I I
.' ( {1(/f~(/1,
.j- I ,.,.. I ' I
f \.-

I I
/,' /-
' ' i I ,.
-
Reference . CaICula.tions' ~ Output
Determination of neutral axis for the cracked section
E5 200
f ae =-- = -- = 24.51 ae = 24.51
Ec,eff 8.16
As,prov 982
= 225 x 320 = 00136
1
p = bd
I
Note4
~ = a, P [ 1+ J a~ p - 11
) ~ = 24.51 x 0.0136 x [,.-1_+_24-.-51_:_0_.0_1_3_6 -11

[. :r x
d= 0.549
x
d = 0.549
x = 175.7 mm
x = 175.7 mm
I 1
b~r3 = 3 d + CTeP
(x)3 {1 - (x)}2
I 1
d
= 3 (0.549) 3 + 24.51 x 0.0136 x (1 - 0.549) 2
) = 0.123
Icr = 0.123 X 225 X 320 3 = 906.9 X 10 6 mm 4 lcr = 906.9
x 10 6 mm 4
)
Calculation of curvature
Note 5 1) M 39.8 x 10 6
! ( -;:- uc = Ec,effluc = 8.16 X 10 3 X (225 X 375 3 /12)
= 4.93 x 10- 6 mm- 1 1
I
I
1)
( -;:- er
_M __ = _ _ _ _ 39_._8_x_1_0__ _ __
6
= Ec,efflcr 8.16 X 10 X 906.9 X 10 6 mm 4

3
! = 5.38 x 10- 5 mm- 1
Note 6 '- Mer= fctm(bh 2 /6) = 2.6 X (225 X 375 2 /6) X 10- 6 Mer
1 = 13.71 kNm = 13.71 kNrn
Table 3.1 [fctm = 2.6 MPa]
l 7.4.3(3) ~ =1- ~(Gsr/ Gs)
2
Eq 7.19 = 1 - 0.5 x (13.71/39.8) 2 = 0.94

Note 7
7.4.3(3) ~r = ~ (~)
r uc
+ (1 - 0 (~) .
r c
Eq 7.18
= {0.94 x 4.93 + (1 - .94) x 5.38} x 10- 5
= 4.96 x 10- 6 mm- 1 = 4.96 x 10- 5 mm- 1
Page 163
L Serviceability Limit State Calculations
Reference Calculations~
,.,.. .
. .. _ Qritput
Calculation of shrinkage curvature
7.4.3(6)
1 s
1,
I.
~
cs
= Ecsae-1
Eq 7.21
3.1.4(6)
Eq 3.8 rI '
3.1.4(6) Eca,oo = kh. Ecd,O = 0.94 X
0.24 X 10- 4
Table 3.2 = 225.6 x 10- 6
Table 3.3
[h 0 = 2Ac/U = 140.6,
Cement CEM Class N and RH = 85%]
3.1.4(6) Eca,oo = 2.5(fck - 10) X 10- 6
Eq 3.12 = 2.5(25 - 10) x 10- 6
= 37.5 x 10- 6
Ecs = (225.6 + 37.5) X 10- 6 = 263.1 X 10- 6 Ecs = 263 X 10- 6
For the uncracked section

7.4.3(6) S = A5 (d - x)
Note 8 = 982 x {320 - (375/2)} = 130.1x10 3 mm 3
I = 225 x 375 3 /12 = 988.8 x 10 6 mm 4
3
1) 6 130.1x10
( -r UC = 263 x 10- x 24.51 x 98 8.8 X 1 06
= 0.85 x 10- 6 mm- 1
For the cracked section

7.4.3(6) S5 = A5 (d - x)
= 982 x (320 - 175.7) = 141.7 x 10 3 mm 3
3
1) - -6 141.7 x 10 I I
(-
r er
- 263 x 10 x 24.51 x 90 9 106
6. X mm
4
= 1.01 x ,io- 6 mm- 1

Average curvature
~r = ~ (~) + (1 - 0 (~)
r ,
7.4.3(3) I
Eq 7.18 r uc r er ,_J
= {0.94 x 1.01 + (1 - 0.94) x 0.85} x 10- 6

= 01.00 x 10- 6 mm- 1
Total curvature= 4.96 x 10- 6 + 1.00 x 10- 6

= 5.96 x 10- 5 mm- 1
.

" .-.
.;-
Reference. -_ca1ul~ti9n~;-
Note 9 OQP -- K. I2 .-1

r
K = 0.104 for simply supported beams.
OQP = 0.104 x 7000 2 x 5.96 x 10- 6
I = 30.37 mm cSQP = 30.37 mm
8QP) 30.37 1 1 . .
OQP/) > _1_
Note 10 ( - 1- = 7000 = 230 > 250 ; (Just unsatisfactory)
I ( I 250
I
t ..
Notes on Calcu lations
r
. ..:-
.. . 3. The quasi-permanent combination is normally used for long term effects and the appearance
of the structure [Clause 6.5 .3(2c) of EN 1990: 2002 (E)].
4. The serviceability calculations are based on a triangular stress block for concrete only above
j the neutral axis - i.e. a cracked section. Instead of using this formula for x / d, we could have
found the value of x by equating the first moments of area of a transformed (cracked) section
about the neutral axis; the area of steel can be converted to an equivalent concrete area based
!.. on ae,eff We then have {b. x. (x/2) }/ae,eff = A5 (d - x)
5. The contribution of the reinforcement to Iuc is here ignored, but can be accommodated using
the modular ratio.
6. Mer is the moment that causes the first cracking in the concrete section.
7. cr 5 r/cr 5 can be replaced by Mcr/M for flexure according to Clause 7.4.3(3).
I 8. The x value for an uncracked section can be found as the distance from the compression face
to the centroid of the equivalent concrete section, using the creep modified modular ratio ae.
I Here however, the distance is taken simply as half the overall depth.
r.
t..
9. Figure 6 of the Concrete Society Publication (Deflection calculations) gives K values for
different loading and support conditions.
10. The final Jong term deflection is slightly greater than span/250. It de~onstrates that the
allowable span/depth ratios (shown to be violated earlier) are not overly conservative.
J.
Concluding Notes
1:
11 . The deflection of the beam is greater than visually acceptable. Either the depth of the beam or
the amount of reinforcement provided could be increased to remedy this .
l 12. This calculation procedure is tedious, and is generally adopted only to explore the possibility
!. of using a beam or sfab section even though the span/depth check fails.

Appendix A
[After Mosley, Bungey & Hulse "Reinforced Concrete Design to Eurocode 2, 6th ed"]
- -- --- - - --- - -- ' I
1. Determination of the area of reinforcement required in singly reinforced _ _ _

rectangu lar sections.
b
-
0.0035 0.567fck
I I
As
~
E
st (b)
(a) (c)
(a) - Section diagram

(b) - Strain diagram
(c) - Rectangular stress block I I
' ,
s = 0.8x
A
M about the centroid of the tension steel.
M = FeeZ (Al)
Fee= 0.567fek X bs (A.2)
M = 0.567fek X bs X z (A.3)
~ _,
z= d- /z
5 (A.4)
M = 1.134 fekb(d - z)z

I
i
I
I
l_J
K = M/bd2fck (A.5)
So K bd 2fck = 1.134 fckb(d - z)z LJ

2
(
2
/ct) - (2/ct) + K/1.134 = O J
so z =ct [o.5 + Jco.25 - K/i. 134 )] (A.6)
f!
u
A
M about the centroid of the rectangular stress block.
M = FstZ (A.7)
Fst = ( -fyk) As = 0.87fyk As (A. 8)

Ys
Appendix A Page 166

M
SoA 5 = - - - (A.9)
f. 0.87fykz
II 2. The balanced section

- According to the Eurocode and the IStructE Manual , the balanced section occurs when
Xbal = 0.45d. This is given to ensure that failure occurs due to yielding of steel rather than
crushing of concrete - i.e. brittle failure is avoided.
S = 0.8 Xbal = 0.8 X 0.45d = Q.36 d

Zbal = d - 5/z = 0.82 d
.. 1.
Fccbal = 0.567 fck X bs = 0.204 fckbd
f' Mbal = FccbaJZbal = 0.204 fckbd X 0.82 d

Mbal
bd2fck = 0.167 = K'
. 1.
If K is greater than 0.167 then compression reinforcement is required to bring the neutral axis
depth back to 0.45d.
I
3. Determination of compression reinforcement
J.
b
-
0.00 35 0.56 7fc k
As
-
Neutral axis
F st
cc I
z
st
(a) (b) (c)
1.
(a) - Section diagram
I
J
(b) - Strain diagram
(c) - Rectangular stress block
l
J
To make a balanced section, Euro code as well as the IStructE Manual for specifies that
x;d = 0.45
x = 0.45 d
s = 0.8 x
1. Sbal = (0.8)(0.45)d
Sbal = 0.36 d
f. Zbal = d - Sbal/2
Page 167
L Appendix A
- d (0.36 d)/
Zbal - - 2
Zbal = 0.82 d
For the equilibrium of the section
Fst = Fse +Fee (A.10)
So when the compression and tension reinforcement are at yielding points

0.87 fykAs = 0.87 fykA~ + 0.567 fekbs
rlt ( l
M about the centroid of the tension steel.
M = F5 e(d - d') +Fee X Zbal
= 0.87 fykA~(d - d') + 0.204 fekbd x 0.82d
= 0.87 fykA~(d - d') + 0.167 fekbd 2 (A.11)
From the above equations it could be derived that

2
A' = M - 0.167 fekbd
(A. 12)
s 0.87 fyk (d - d')
(K - Kba1)fekbd 2
A'=------ (A.13)
s 0.87fyk(d - d')
2
Kbalfekbd /
As= +As (A. 14)
0.87fykZbal
From Figure (b), the strain in the compression reinforcement at failure
5e 0.0035
x-d' x
d' Ese
-=1---- (A. 15)
x 0.0035
So at yielding point when fyk is 460 MPa, the strain in the steel (c: 5 c) is 0.002. Therefore, yielding
r -.
of the compression steel occurs when I I .i
d' 0.002
1
-; = - 0.0035 (:5 43 )
Since x = 0.45d , yielding of compression reinforcement occurs when
d'
d < (0.43)(0.45) = 0.194
If d'/d > 0.194, the actual strain in the compression reinforcement has to be calculated, and the
Appendix A Page 168

f
I
stress in the compression steel based on equation A.16 has to be calculated.
I
fsc = Es X Esc (A.16)
So the area of compression reinforcement becomes,
A~ Kba 1)fckb~
2
= (K - (A. 17)
0.87 fsc(d - d )
Area of tension reinforcement will be
Kbalfckbd 2 fsc
As = +A~ x --- (A. 18)
0.87 fykZbal 0.87 fyk
..
!
. '
4_ 1~
, ...,
I
L
l
!
Appendix A Page 169
L
Appendix B
' Expression for longitudinal shear force at the flange-web intersection
d~
~ .. . . ~
~ 2(F
M M+b.M
i
"
.
~
...r
tu
(a) Longitudinal Section
l..o
b eff ...
'" r
. ""
',..
d
0 0
~
~
...
r
bw
(b) Cross Section
(See Figure 6.7 in Eurocode 2)

LJ
The force b.Fct could be found as, ' 1
b.M (beff - bw)/2

b.Fct = (d - hr/2) x beff
'-
Appendix B Page 170

I
I.
r
I Appendix C
I.
Design Cha rt: Sin gly Reinforced Secti ons
2
M/bd fck lOOAs/bdfck
0.005 0.0013
0.010 0.0026
I 0.015 0.0039
0.020 0.0053
0.025 0.0066
/- :
0.030 0.0079
:j
r 0.035
0.040
0.045
0.0092
0.0105
0.0118
0.050 0.0132
f
0.055 0.0145
I 0.060
0.065
0.0159
0.0173
0.070 0 .0187
I 0.075
0.080
0.0202
0.0217
0.0231
I 0.085
0 .090 0.0246
0.095 0.0262
t.
0.100 0.0277
0.105 0.0293
[.. 0.110 0.0309
l .
0.115 0.0325
0.120 0.0341
t. 0.125 0.0358
0.130 0.0374
I
~
0.135
0 .140
0 .0392
0 .0409
0.145 0.0427
r.
J 0 .150 0 .0445
0.155 0.0463
l: 0.160
0.165
0.0482
0.0501
-
F 0.167 0 .0509
Appendix C Page 171

Appendix D
Design Charts: Concr ete Shear Resista nce (MPa)
d (mm)
Grade 20
:5200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
0.10 0.44 0.41 0.38 0 .36 0 .35 0.34 0.33 0.32 0.31 0.30 0 .30 0.29 0.29
0.15 0.44 0.41 0 .38 0 .36 0.35 0.34 0 .33 0.32 0.31 0.30 0.30 0.29 0.29
0.20 0.44 0.41 0.38 0.36 0.35 0.34 0.33 0.32 0.31 0.30 0.30 0.29 0 .29
0.30 0.44 0 .41 0.39 0 .38 0.37 0.36 0 .35 0.35 0 .34 0.34 0.33 0.33 0.33
0.40 0.48 0.45 0.43 0.42 0.41 0.40 0 .39 0 .38 0 .38 0 .37 0.37 0.36 0.36 .'
0.50 0.51 0.49 0.47 0.45 0.44 0.43 0 .42 0 .41 0.40 0.40 0.39 0 .39 0.38
-
"C
.0
c:t:."'
0
0
......
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.54
0.57
0.60
0.52
0.54
0 .57
0.49
0.52
0.54
0.48
0.50
0.53
0.47
0.49
0.51
0.45
0.48
0.50
0.44
0.47
0.49
0.44
0.46
0 .48
0 .43
0.45
0.47
0.42
0.45
0.47
0.42
0.44
0.46
0.41
0.43
0.45
0.41
0.43
0.45
0.90 0.62 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0 .51 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.47 0.47
1.00 0.64 0 .61 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.54 0 .53 0.52 0.51 0 .50 0.49 0.49 0.48
1.25 0.69 0 .66 0.63 0 .61 0.59 0 .58 0.57 0 .56 0.55 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.52
1.50 0.74 0 .70 0.67 0.65 0 .63 0 .61 0 .60 0 .59 0 .58 0 .57 0.57 0.56 0.55
1.75 0 .78 0 .73 0.70 0 .68 0.66 0 .65 0 .63 0.62 0 .61 0 .60 0.60 0 .59 0.58
~2 . 0 0.81 0.77 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.68 0 .66 0 .65 0 .64 0 .63 0.62 0 .61 0.61
d (mm)
Grade 25
:5200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
0.10 0.49 0.46 0.43 0.41 0.39 0.38 0 .37 0.36 0 .35 0 .34 0.33 0.33 0 .32
0.15 0.49 0.46 0.43 0.41 0.39 0 .38 0.37 0 .36 0.35 0 .34 0.33 0.33 0.32 i
0.20 0.49 0.46 0.43 0.4 1 0.39 0 .38 0.37 0 .36 0 .35 0 .34 0.33 0 .33 0 .32
J
0.30 0.49 0 .46 0.43 0.41 0.40 0.39 0.38 0.37 0.37 0.36 0.36 0.35 0.35
0.40 0.51 0.49 0.47 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.41 0.40 0.40 0.39 0.39 0.38
0.50 0.55 0 .52 0.50 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45 0 .44 0 .44 0 .43 0.42 0.42 0.41 -
-
"C
.0
<{
0
0
......
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.59
0 .62
0.64
0.56
0.58
0.61
0.53
0.56
0.59
0.51
0.54
0.57
0.50
0.53
0 .55
0.49
0 .51
0 .54
0.48
0 .50
0.53
0.47
0.49
0 .52
0.46
0.49
0 .51
0.46
0.48
0 .50
-
0.45
0.47
0.49
0.44
0.47
0.49
0.44
0.46
0.48
I
.J
0.90 0.67 0 .64 0 .61 0.59 0 .57 0 .56 0.55 0.54 0.53 0 .52 0.51 0.51 0 .50
1.00 0.69 0 .66 0.63 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.57 0 .56 0 .55 0 .54 0.53 0.53 0.52
1.25 0.75 0 .71 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.61 0 .60 0.59 0 .58 0.57 0.57 0 .56
1.50 0 .79 0 .75 0.72 0.70 0.68 0 .66 0.65 0 .64 0 .63 0.62 0.61 0 .60 0.60
1.75 0.84 0 .79 0.76 0.73 0.71 0 .70 0.68 0 .67 0 .66 0.65 0.64 0 .63 0 .63
~2.0 0.87 0 .83 0.79 0.77 0.74 0.73 0 .71 0 .70 0 .69 0 .68 0.67 0 .66 0.65
App endix D Page 172

Priyan Dias-Graded Example To EC2.pdf-1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Priyan Dias-Graded Example To EC2.pdf-1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I '--

E o code 2 (3rd edition)

Published by the Society of Structural Engineers - Sri Lanka

Background and Acknowledgements

The Transition from BS 8110 to EC2

l Some Differences in Process and Output

L BS EN 1990: 2002. Eurocode - Basis of Structural Design, British Standards Institution,

CHAPTER 1: Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure

CHAPTER 2: Design of Beam Sections in Flexure

CHAPTER 3: Design of Beams for Shear

CHAPTER 4: Serviceability Checks and Detailing in Beams

) CHAPTER 5: Design of Slabs

t. Example 22 Pad Footing

CHAPTER 9: Design of wall and Corbel

CHAPTER I 0: Design of Beam for Torsion

CHAPTER 11: Frame Analysis and moment Redistribution

CHAPTER 12: Design for Stability

CHAPTER 13: Severability limit State Calculations

Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure

Example 1 - Analysis of Under-Reinforced Section

..; f" I< 225 ) I

Note 2 fyk = 460 MPa

Note 4 fek = 20 MPa

L Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 1

Hence balancing compressive force = 377,189 N

Eq 3.19 'A=0.8and11=I .Oforfck $50MPa

Moment of resistance= 377,189 x 301

4. fck is the characteristic cylindrical strength of concrete according to Clause -3.1.2(1).

I< 150 >I

Reference Calculations Output

Assuming that the steel has yielded,

We shall try to find a value for x, by trial and error, such

Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 4

Reference Calculations . qutput

1. For a better approximation, try x = 210 mm.

For a still better approximation, try x = 211 mm x = 211 mm

This approximation is sufficient.

Note4 Note:- Alternative method of finding x.

T = (0.00 35 )( 3 00 - x) (200 x 10 3 ) x 981.7 N

Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 5

0. 87 x 460 = 400 N/mm 2

Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 6

r (All dimensions in mm)

Note 3 Assume a suitable value ford', say SO mm. d' =SO mm

Setting x = (0.4S)d = 13S mm (which automatically

By balancing the compression and the tension force,

L Analy sis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 7

= 1.15 > 0.2; hence OK

523 mm2 . 523 mm 2

Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 8

Assume also that the steel has yielded. \ J

C = (0.567)fck.Ac = (0.567)(20)(22,944) = 260,185 N

Try x = 155 mm x = 155 mm

Depth in compression= (0.8) (155) = 124 mm.

Hence, lever am1 (z) = 400 - 55.11 = 345 mm z = 345 mm

Note 3 Note: - Alternative method of finding x.

Assuming that steel has yielded,

For any x, the area under compression is

Putting T = C, we have the quadratic equation,

Analysis of Beam Sections in Flexure Page 10

Example 5 - Design of Rectangular Section

(a) Singly reinforced section

Note 2 Let us assume that djb = 2.0